You are on page 1of 260

18GA-126-AB

ALFA ROMEO GIULIA


2017 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Second Edition
Owners Manual ALFA ROMEO is a registered trademark of FCA Group Marketing S.p.A., used with permission. Printed in U.S.A. 2018 QUADRIFOGLIO OWNERS MANUAL
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name features and equipment that are either standard or op- INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a EQUIPMENT routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. description of features and equipment that are no longer Special design considerations are incorporated into this only fully shielded coaxial cable.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please vehicles electronic system to provide immunity to radio
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of disregard any features and equipment described in this frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
accidents. manual that are not on this vehicle. equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation. Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
normal may require special precautions.
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve- The positive power connection should be made directly
drinking, dont drive. Ride with a designated non- ments to its products without imposing any obligation to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans- upon itself to install them on products previously manu- The negative power connection should be made to body ence between the communications equipment and the
portation. factured. sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. vehicles electronic systems.
This connection should not be fused.
WARNING!
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive. vehicles so equipped.
Copyright 2017 FCA US LLC
DEAR CUSTOMER
Dear Customer,
We would like to congratulate and thank you for choosing Alfa Romeo.
We have written this Owners Manual to help you get to know all of the features of your vehicle and use it in the best possible way.
Please take the necessary time to familiarize yourself with all the dynamic features of your vehicle.
Here you will find important information and warnings regarding the use of your vehicle, and how to achieve the best performance
from the technical features of your Alfa Romeo.
You are advised to read through the Owners Manual before taking it on the road for the first time. It is important to become familiar
with the controls of your vehicle, especially with sections concerning the brakes, handling, transmission, and vehicle behavior on
different road surfaces.
This Owners Manual also provides a description of special features and tips, as well as essential information for the safe driving,
care, and maintenance of your Alfa Romeo over time.
In the provided Warranty Booklet, you will also find a description of the services that Alfa Romeo offers to its customers. The New
Vehicle Limited Warranty will detail the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity.
We are sure that these will help you to get in touch with and appreciate both your new vehicle and the service provided by the people
at Alfa Romeo.
For questions or comments pertaining to your vehicle, please contact the Alfa Romeo Customer Care Center:
P.O. Box 218004 Auburn Hills, MI
483218004 Phone: 1-844-Alfa-USA
(1-844-253-2872)
READ THIS CAREFULLY
Refueling
Do not use fuel containing methanol or ethanol E85. Using these mixtures may cause misfiring and driving issues, as well as damage vital components
of the supply system.
For further details on the use of the correct fuel, see the "Fuel Requirements" paragraph in the "Technical Specifications" chapter.

Starting The Engine


Make sure that the electric park brake is engaged and that the transmission is in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). Next, press the brake pedal, and then push
the engine START/STOP button.

Parking On Flammable Material


The catalytic converter develops high temperatures during operation. Do not park the vehicle on grass, dry leaves, pine needles or other flammable
material: fire hazard.

Respecting The Environment


The vehicle is fitted with a system that carries out a continuous diagnosis of the emission-related components in order to help protect the
environment.

Electrical Accessories
If you decide to add electrical accessories after purchasing the vehicle, (with the risk of gradually draining the battery), contact your authorized
dealer. They can calculate the overall electrical requirement and check that the vehicle's electric system can support the required load.

Scheduled Servicing
Correctly performed maintenance procedures are essential for ensuring that your vehicle continuously maintains its quality in performance and
safety features, environmental friendliness, and low running costs.
VEHICLE CHANGES / ALTERATIONS
Accessories Purchased By The Owner

Warning!

Any change or alteration of the vehicle might seriously affect its safety and road handling, thus causing accidents, in which the occupants could
even be fatally injured.

If you decide to install electrical accessories that require a permanent electrical supply (e.g. radio, satellite anti-theft system, etc.) or
accessories that in any case drain the electrical supply after purchasing the vehicle, contact your authorized dealer. Dealer personnel
will check whether the vehicles's electrical system is able to withstand the load required or whether it needs to be integrated with a
more powerful battery.
Note: Use caution when adding additional spoilers, alloy wheel rims, or non-standard wheel hubs: they could reduce the ventilation
of the brakes and affect efficiency under sharp and repeated braking, or on long descents. Make sure that nothing obstructs the
pedals (mats, etc.).
FCA US LLC shall not be liable for damage caused by the installation of accessories either not supplied or recommended by FCA US
LLC and/or not installed in compliance with the provided instructions.
Installing Electrical/Electronic Devices
FCA US LLC authorizes the installation of transceivers provided that installation is carried out at a specialized center, in compliance
with manufacturer's specifications.
Note: Local authorities may not allow the vehicle on the road if devices that modify the features of the vehicle have been installed.
This also may void the warranty in relation to faults caused by the change either directly or indirectly related to it.
FCA US LLC shall not be liable for damage caused by the installation of accessories either not supplied or recommended by FCA US
LLC and/or not installed in compliance with the provided instructions.
Radio Transmitters And Mobile Phones
Radio transmitter equipment (vehicle mobile phones, CB (Citizen Band) radios, amateur radio etc.) cannot be used inside the vehicle
unless a separate antenna is mounted externally.
Transmission and reception of these devices may be affected by the shielding effect of the vehicle body. As far as the use of
approved mobile phones is concerned, follow the usage instructions provided by the mobile phone Manufacturer.

Caution!

The use of these devices inside the passenger compartment (without an external antenna) may cause the electrical systems to malfunction.
This could compromise the safety of the vehicle in addition to constituting a potential hazard for passengers' health.
If mobile phones/laptops/smartphones/tablets are inside the vehicle and/or close to the electronic key, a reduced performance of the Passive
Entry/Keyless Start system may occur may occur.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Operating Instructions
Each time an instruction is given that concerns direction (left/right or forward/backward), it is written to be read from the
perspective of an occupant in the driver's seat. If a direction is written from a different perspective, it will be specified as such in the
text as appropriate.
The figures in the manual are only examples: this might imply that some details of the image do not correspond to the actual
arrangement of your vehicle.
To identify the chapter with the information necessary, you can consult the index at the end of this manual.
Chapters can be rapidly identified with dedicated graphic tabs, located at the side of each odd page. There is also a key for getting to
know the chapter order and the relevant symbols in the tabs. Additionally, there is a textual indication of each current chapter at the
side of each even page.
Warnings And Cautions
While reading this Owners Manual you will find a series of WARNINGS that must be carefully followed to prevent incorrect use of the
components of the vehicle, which could cause accidents or injuries.
There are also CAUTIONS to prevent procedures that could damage your vehicle.
Therefore all WARNINGS and CAUTIONS must always be carefully followed.
WARNINGS and CAUTIONS are recalled in the text with the following symbols:
Personal Safety:
Vehicle Safety:
Note: This Owners Manual describes the Quadrifoglio model. Optional contents, including equipment meant for specific
Markets or particular models, are not identified as such in the text: you need to consider only the information related to the
model you own. Any content introduced throughout the production of the model, outside of the specific request of options at
the time of purchase, will be identified with the wording (if-equipped).
All data contained in this publication is intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a
constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described
for technical and/or commercial reasons.
For further information, contact your authorized dealer.
Symbols
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating precautions to be observed when using this component. It is
important to follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for a brief description of each symbol.

IT CAN START
READ THE OWNER DO NOT TOUCH WITH
AUTOMATICALLY ALSO
HANDBOOK HANDS
WITH ENGINE OFF

DO NOT OPEN THE CAP


DO NOT OPEN: HIGH
PROTECT YOUR EYES WHEN THE ENGINE IS
PRESSURE GAS
HOT

MOVING PARTS KEEP PARTS


KEEP CHILDREN AT A
BURSTING OF YOUR BODY AND
DISTANCE
CLOTHES AWAY

DO NOT APPROACH
CORROSIVE LIQUID HIGH VOLTAGE
FLAMES
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SAFETY

STARTING AND OPERATING

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

INDEX
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

FRONT VIEW

03016S0002EM
Front View
1 Headlights 4 Doors
2 Tires And Wheels 5 Engine Compartment
3 Exterior Mirrors 6 Windshield

9
REAR VIEW

03026S0002EM
Rear View
1 Tail Lights
2 Trunk Lid

10
INSTRUMENT PANEL

03036S0050EM
Instrument Panel
1 Headlight Switch 5 Instrument Cluster 9 Climate Control System
2 Air Vents 6 Steering Wheel 10 Glove Compartment
3 Multifunction Stalk 7 Windshield Wiper Stalk 11 Passenger-Side Air Bag
4 Controls On Steering Wheel 8 Information And Entertainment
System

11
VEHICLE INTERIOR

03046S0001EM
Vehicle Interior
1 Driver Seat 4 Hazard Warning Lights
2 Power Windows/Power Mirrors Controls 5 Alfa DNA Pro Drive Mode System
3 Gear Selector/Paddle Shifter If Equipped

12
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

In this section, you will find important KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14


information to help you become familiar IGNITION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . .16
with the features needed to operate your ENGINE IMMOBILIZER . . . . . . . . .18
vehicle, and how they function. SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM . . . . . .19
DOORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
HEAD RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . .28
STEERING WHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . .30
MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
EXTERIOR LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . .33
INTERIOR LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . .36
WINDSHIELD WIPERS . . . . . . . . . .38
CLIMATE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . .40
POWER WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . .47
HOOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
TRUNK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . .51
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
SYSTEMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
ACTIVE AERODYNAMICS . . . . . . . .55

13
KEYS panic alarm will remain active for three Operation
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

minutes, and can be deactivated:


Key Fob Door And Trunk Lid Unlock
By pushing the PANIC button again. Briefly pushing the unlock button on the
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition
system. This system includes a key fob Automatically if the vehicle speed key fob will unlock the doors and trunk
and a keyless push button ignition. exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h). lid, turn on the interior lights, and flash
the turn signals once (if activated from
The Remote Keyless Entry key fob allows In both cases, the panic alarm is the Information and Entertainment
you to lock or unlock the doors and trunk immediately deactivated. System).
or activate the Panic Alarm from
distances. The key fob does not need to Push and release the unlock button on the
be pointed at the vehicle to activate the Warning! key fob once to unlock the driver side
system. front door or twice within one second to
unlock all doors and the trunk lid.
Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the
automatic transmission into PARK, apply The current unlock setting can be
the parking brake, turn the engine OFF, changed through the Information and
remove the key fob from the vehicle and Entertainment System menu, so that the
lock your vehicle. system unlocks:
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or All doors unlock on the first push of
with access to an unlocked vehicle. the key fob unlock button.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle Unlock the driver door on the first
unattended is dangerous for a number of push of the key fob unlock button.
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be warned Flashing of the turn signals upon
04016S0001EM
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal locking/unlocking the doors and
Key Fob or the gear selector. activation of the courtesy light upon
PANIC Function Do not leave the key fob in or near the unlocking the doors can be activated or
The key fob contains a PANIC button. vehicle, or in a location accessible to deactivated through the Information and
Should you ever feel threatened, push children. A child could operate power Entertainment System. For further
this button and the vehicle security alarm windows, other controls, or move the information, refer to the Information and
will sound. vehicle. Entertainment System Owners Manual
To activate the PANIC function, push and Do not leave children or animals inside Supplement.
hold the PANIC button for at least one parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat The doors can also be unlocked by using
second. When the panic alarm is active, build-up may cause serious injury or death. the emergency key, located inside the
the headlights turn on, the turn signals key fob.
flash, the horn honks intermittently, and
all interior adjustable lights turn on. The
14
Door And Trunk Lid Lock Pushing the lock or unlock button again
Briefly pushing the lock button on the key will restart the lights turn on timer (if the
fob will lock the doors and trunk lid, turn parking lights functions were already
off the interior lights, and flash the turn active, it will remain active).
signals (if activated in the Information This function is available only if the doors
and Entertainment System). are closed.
If one or more doors are open, these Replacing The Electronic Key Fob
doors will also lock, and this is indicated Battery
by a rapid flashing of the turn signals. The
doors prepare for locking, which To replace the battery, proceed as
becomes active from the moment they follows: 04016S0003EM
are closed. The doors will unlock again 1. Push the sides of the key fob inward Removing Emergency Key
only if the key fob is detected inside the and extract the cover pulling downwards.
passenger compartment. 3. Remove the battery plug by rotating it
counter clockwise.
The doors can be locked by using the
emergency key in the drivers side door
lock.
Trunk Lid Opening
Rapidly push the trunk lid key fob button
twice to open the trunk lid. The turn
signals will flash to indicate that the
trunk lid has been opened.
Remote Start
The remote start button on the key fob 04016S0002EM
enables engine starting (push the button Key Fob Cover Removal 04016S0004EM
twice within five seconds to start the Removing Battery Plug
engine). 2. Remove the emergency key from its
housing. 4. Remove the battery from its slot and
Car Finder
replace it with a new one of the same
Push the lock or unlock button to
type.
remotely and temporarily turn on the turn
signals and headlights.
This is useful for finding the vehicle easily
in a crowded area like a parking garage,
for example.

15
Duplicating Keys IGNITION SYSTEM
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

If you need a replacement key fob, go to Operation


an authorized dealer.
To activate the keyless ignition, the key
General Information fob must be inside the passenger
The following regulatory statement compartment.
applies to all Radio Frequency (RF)
devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Industry Canada
04016S0005EM license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Battery Location Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
Proceed in reverse order to reassemble
the key. 1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
Caution! 2. This device must accept any 04026S0001EM
interference received, including Keyless Ignition START/STOP Button
interference that may cause undesired
The battery replacement operation must be operation. The keyless ignition has the following
done with care, in order not to damage the modes:
electronic key. Note: Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party STOP: engine off, steering locked.
responsible for compliance could void the Some electrical devices (e.g. central door
Request For Additional Keys locking system, alarm, etc.) are still
users authority to operate the
The system can recognize up to eight key equipment. available.
fobs with remote control. ON: all electrical devices are available.
To guarantee that the engine starts and This state can be entered by pushing the
the vehicle operates correctly, use only ignition button once, without pressing the
electronic key fobs specifically coded for brake pedal.
the vehicles electronics.
AVV: engine starting. This state can be
If an electronic key fob is coded for a entered by pushing the ignition button
vehicle, it cannot be used on any other once while pressing the brake pedal.
vehicle.

16
Note: touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the Starting With A Discharged Key Fob
transmission gear selector. Battery
With the keyless ignition in the ON
position: if 30 minutes pass with the Do not leave the key fob in or near the If the key fob battery is discharged,
gear selector in P (Park) and the engine vehicle, (or in a location accessible to proceed as follows to start the vehicle:
stopped, the keyless ignition will children), and do not leave the ignition in the
automatically reset to the STOP AVV or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate 1. Lift the front armrest.
position. power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
2. Lay the key fob on the key fob outline
With the engine started, it is possible found on the floor of the armrest
Be sure the parking brake is fully compartment while pushing the
to remove the key fob from the vehicle. disengaged before driving; failure to do so
The engine will remain running and the START/STOP button to start the ignition.
can lead to brake failure and a collision.
instrument cluster will indicate the
absence of the key fob when the door is Always fully apply the parking brake when
closed. leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause
damage or injury. Also be certain to leave
For more information on the engine the transmission in PARK. Failure to do so
start-up, refer to "Starting The Engine" in may allow the vehicle to roll and cause
"Starting And Operating." damage or injury.
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake
engaged, or repeated use of the parking
Warning! brake to slow the vehicle may cause serious
damage to the brake system.
04026S0002EM
Never use the PARK position as a Key Fob Placement Location
substitute for the parking brake. Always Caution!
apply the parking brake fully when parked General Information
to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage. The following regulatory statement
If the Brake System Warning Light remains applies to all Radio Frequency (RF)
When exiting the vehicle, always make on with the parking brake released, a brake
system malfunction is indicated. Have the
devices equipped in this vehicle:
sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove
the key fob from the vehicle, and lock your brake system serviced by an authorized This device complies with Part 15 of the
vehicle. dealer immediately. FCC Rules and with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or Operation is subject to the following two
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing
children to be in a vehicle unattended is
conditions:
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child 1. This device may not cause harmful
or others could be seriously or fatally interference, and
injured. Children should be warned not to

17
2. This device must accept any ENGINE IMMOBILIZER possible to start the engine, contact an
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

interference received, including authorized dealer.


interference that may cause undesired Engine Immobilizer Operation
If the Engine Immobilizer Failure/
operation. The Engine Immobilizer system prevents Break-in Attempt icon is displayed
Note: Changes or modifications not unauthorized use of the vehicle by while driving, this means that the system
expressly approved by the party disabling engine starting. is running a self-diagnosis (e.g. due to a
responsible for compliance could void the The system does not need to be enabled voltage drop). If the display persists,
users authority to operate the or activated. Operation of the contact an authorized dealer.
equipment. immobilizer is automatic whether the
Note:
vehicle's doors are locked or unlocked.
When the ignition is set to ON, the Engine Do not tamper with the Engine
Immobilizer system identifies the code Immobilizer system. Any modifications
transmitted by the key. If the code is or alterations could cause the protection
recognized as valid, the Engine function to be deactivated.
Immobilizer system enables engine The Engine Immobilizer system is not
starting. compatible with certain aftermarket
When the ignition is brought back to remote starting systems. The use of
STOP, the Engine Immobilizer system these devices could cause problems
deactivates the control unit controlling when starting, as well as the
the engine, disabling engine starting. deactivation of the protection function.
For the correct engine starting All keys provided with the vehicle
procedures, refer to Starting The have been programmed in accordance
Engine in Starting And Operating. with the electronics on the vehicle itself.
Irregular Operation
Each key has its own code which must
If the key code is not recognized during
be stored by the system's control unit.
starting, the Engine Immobilizer
Contact an authorized dealer to have
Failure/Break-in Attempt icon is
new keys (up to eight) stored with a
displayed on the instrument panel (refer
code.
to "Warning Lights And Messages" in
"Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel"). This condition leads to the engine
turning off after two seconds. In this
case, switch the ignition to STOP and
then to ON; if it is still blocked, try with
the other keys provided. If it is still not

18
SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM the doors, hood, and trunk lid are closed
correctly and then rearm the system by
Alarm Activation pushing the lock button on the key fob.
While armed, the alarm will sound in the If the alarm emits an acoustic signal even
following scenarios: when the doors, hood, and trunk lid are
Opening of doors/hood/trunk lid correctly closed, a fault has occurred in
(perimeter protection) system operation. In this case, contact an
authorized dealer.
Operation of ignition with a key which
is not validated To Disarm The Alarm

Cutting of the battery cables 04056S0003EM


Push the unlock button to disarm the
Passive Entry Door Handle Button alarm. While disarming, the following
Movement inside the passenger operations are performed:
compartment (volumetric protection if When the alarm is armed, the warning
equipped) lights on the panels of the interior front Two brief flashes of the turn signals (if
door handles will flash. programmed)
Unexpected lifting/tilting of the
vehicle (anti-lift protection if Two brief acoustic signals (if
equipped) programmed)

Activation of the alarm triggers the Doors are unlocked


acoustic warning and the turn signals. The alarm can also be disarmed using the
Note: The alarm system is activated by Passive Entry System, by grasping one of
the Engine Immobilizer system, which is the Passive Entry front door handles with
automatically activated when you get out a valid key fob in hand to unlock. For
of the vehicle with the key fob and lock further information refer to "Passive
the doors. Entry" in "Doors.
To Arm The Alarm 04046S0001EM

With the doors, hood, and trunk lid closed Lock/Unlock Buttons
and the keyless ignition system placed in The activation of the alarm is preceded
the STOP position, push and release the by a self-diagnosis stage: if a fault is
lock button on the key fob. The alarm can detected, the system emits a further
also be armed by pushing the Passive acoustic signal.
Entry door handle button, located on the If a second acoustic signal is emitted
exterior door handle. For further after the alarm is already armed, wait
information, refer to "Passive Entry" in about four seconds and disarm the alarm
"Doors. by pushing the unlock button. Verify that
19
DOORS
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Locking And Unlocking Doors From The


Inside
If all doors are closed properly, they will
automatically lock once the vehicle has
exceeded approximately 12 mph
(20 km/h) (Auto Relock function active).
Push the interior lock button on the driver
or passenger side door panel trim to lock
04056S0003EM 04046S0002EM
the doors.
Passive Entry Door Handle Button Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection Button With doors locked, push the unlock
button on the interior trim panel to
Note: The alarm does not disarm when Any disabling of the Volumetric/Anti-Lift
unlock the doors.
the doors are unlocked by inserting the Protection must be repeated each time
blade of the emergency key, found inside the instrument panel is switched off. Note: The key fob may not be found if it
the key fob, into the door handle lock is located next to a mobile phone, lap top
To Disarm The Alarm Using Passive or other electronic device; these devices
cylinder.
Entry may block the key fobs wireless signal.
Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection If
To completely deactivate the alarm (e.g.
Equipped
during a long period of vehicle inactivity),
To ensure the correct operation of the insert the blade of the emergency key,
Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection system, found inside the key fob, into the door
completely close the side windows. handle lock cylinder and turn the
To disable the function, push the emergency key to the right (clockwise) to
Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection button lock the door(s).
before activating the alarm.
When the function is disabled, this is
indicated by the light on the
Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection button 04056S0001EM
flashing for several seconds. Door Lock And Unlock Switch Panel

20
Unlock Turn the emergency key to
the left (counter clockwise)
Warning! Caution!
Passive Entry
Do not leave children or animals inside An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always The Passive Entry system can identify
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat remove the key from the ignition and lock all the presence of a key fob near the doors
build-up may cause serious injury or death. of the doors when leaving the vehicle and trunk lid.
unattended. The system enables the doors and trunk
For personal security and safety in the
event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors as lid to be locked or unlocked without
you drive as well as when you park and leave Locking/Unlocking Doors From The pushing any button on the key fob.
the vehicle. Outside The key fob is detected only after the
Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the system recognizes the presence of a
When locking the doors from the outside
automatic transmission into PARK, apply hand on one of the front door handles. If
with the doors closed, push the lock
the parking brake, turn the engine OFF, the detected key fob is valid, the doors
remove the key fob from the vehicle and button on the key fob.
and the trunk lid are unlocked (refer to
lock your vehicle. The door lock can be activated with all the Information and Entertainment
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
doors locked and the trunk lid open. When System Owners Manual Supplement for
with access to an unlocked vehicle. the lock button on the key fob is pushed, Passive Entry Settings).
all locks are activated, including the open
Allowing children to be in a vehicle Note: The key fob may not be able to be
trunk lid. The trunk lid will be locked when
unattended is dangerous for a number of detected by the vehicle keyless-go
it is closed.
reasons. A child or others could be seriously system if it is located next to a mobile
or fatally injured. Children should be warned When unlocking the doors from the phone, laptop or other electronic device;
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal outside, push the unlock button on the these devices may block the key fobs
or the gear selector. key fob. wireless signal and prevent the
Do not leave the key fob in or near the Locking/Unlocking Doors From The keyless-go system from starting the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to Outside In An Emergency vehicle.
children. A child could operate power If the battery is discharged or the key fob Grasping the handle of the driver's door
windows, other controls, or move the is inoperable, you can lock or unlock the unlocks the driver's side door, or all doors
vehicle. doors from the outside by inserting the depending on the mode set using the
blade of the emergency key, found inside Information and Entertainment System
the key fob, into the door handle lock (refer to the Information and
cylinder and turn the emergency key as Entertainment System Owners Manual
follows. Supplement for Passive Entry Settings).
Lock Turn the emergency key to the Note: If wearing gloves, or if it has rained
right (clockwise) and the door handle is wet, the activation

21
sensitivity of the Passive Entry function 2. Remove the emergency key from the
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

may be reduced, resulting in a longer key fob housing.


reaction time.
3. Insert the emergency key in the driver
Door Locking side door lock cylinder and turn it to the
To lock the doors, proceed as follows: left (counter clockwise) to unlock the
1. Make sure that you have the key fob door.
and are close to the drivers or
passengers side door handle.
2. Push the Passive Entry door handle
button or the Passive Entry trunk lid 04056S0005EM
button, which is located next to the Exterior Trunk Lid Button
exterior trunk lid release button. This will Note: After pushing the Passive Entry
lock all doors and the trunk lid. Door door handle button, you must wait two
locking will activate the alarm as well. seconds before the doors can be
unlocked again using the passive entry
door handle button. This feature makes it 04016S0002EM
possible to check whether the vehicle has Emergency Key Release Buttons
been locked correctly by pulling the door
handle within two seconds. The doors will
not be unlocked again.
The vehicle doors and trunk lid can be
locked by pushing the lock button on the
key fob or on the interior door lock.
Driver Side Door Emergency Opening
04056S0003EM If the key fob does not work, e.g. because
Passive Entry Door Handle Button its battery is discharged or the vehicle
battery is discharged, the emergency key
can be used to unlock the driver side
04016S0003EM
door. Emergency Key
To remove the emergency key from the
key fob, proceed as follows: Note:

1. Push the sides of the key fob inward The emergency key blade is not
and extract the cover pulling downwards. directional and can be inserted
indifferently into the lock.
22
To avoid leaving the key fob inside While pulling the handle, do not push the
the vehicle accidentally, the Passive door lock/unlock button on the handle.
Entry function features an automatic
door unlocking function.
If one of the vehicle doors is open and
the "door locking" button on the front
door handles or lock button in the
interior door lock switch panel is pushed,
a check of the inside and outside of the
vehicle for the presence of the key fob is
made once all the open doors are closed. 04056S0005EM
Exterior Trunk Lid Release Button
04056S0004EM Note:
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When
Locking If the key fob is inadvertently
forgotten inside of the trunk, and an
If the key fob is detected inside the attempt is made to close it from outside,
vehicle, the Passive Entry function the trunk lid will not lock. With the doors
automatically unlocks all the vehicle locked, the trunk lid unlocked, and the
doors and flashes the turn signals. key fob detected inside the vehicle, the
If one or more key fobs are inside the trunk lid will unlock again and the lights
passenger compartment, the lock button flash twice.
04056S0003EM on the key fob inside the passenger
Passive Entry Door Handle Button compartment is temporarily disabled. Before driving, make sure the trunk
lid is closed correctly.
The vehicle will not unlock the doors if an
unauthorized key fob has been detected Trunk Lid Lock
close to the outside of the vehicle. The trunk lid of the vehicle may still be
If the Passive Entry function is disabled locked by pushing the lock button on the
using the Information and Entertainment key fob, pushing the door lock button on
System, the protections to avoid the door handles, or pushing the lock
accidentally leaving the key fob inside button on the interior door panel of the
the vehicle are deactivated. vehicle.
Trunk Lid Access On vehicles equipped with Passive Entry,
Approaching the trunk lid with a valid key the trunk lid and the doors can be locked
04056S0001EM fob, push the opening button to access by pushing the button located near the
Interior Lock Switch Panel the trunk lid. opening button of the trunk lid.
23
responsible for compliance could void the Unlocking The Doors With A Discharged
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

users authority to operate the Battery


equipment.
Proceed as follows to unlock the doors if
Child Safety Locks the vehicle battery is discharged.
To provide a safer environment for small Rear Doors And Passenger Door
children riding in the rear seats, the rear 1. With the doors unlocked insert the
doors are equipped with Child-Protection emergency key from the key fob or a flat
Door Lock system. bladed screwdriver into the door lock
This device can be engaged only with the manual release lock cylinder.
04056S0005EM
doors open.
Exterior Trunk Lid Button
System Activation/Deactivation
The Passive entry system can be
activated or deactivated using the
Information and Entertainment System.
General Information
The following regulatory statement
applies to all radio frequency (RF)
04056S0008EM
devices equipped in this vehicle:
04056S0007EM Door Lock Manual Release Lock
This device complies with Part 15 of the Child Safety Lock Positions Cylinder
FCC Rules and with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s). Lock position: device locked (door 2. Turn the manual release lock cylinder
Operation is subject to the following two opened from exterior only) clockwise for the right door locks or
conditions: Unlock position: device unlocked (door counterclockwise for the left door locks.
1. This device may not cause harmful may be opened from the inside) 3. Remove the key/screwdriver from the
interference, and The Child Safety Locks remain locked manual release lock.
even if the doors are unlocked. Proceed in one of the following ways to
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including Note: The rear doors cannot be opened realign the door lock device (only when
interference that may cause undesired from the inside when the Child Safety the battery charge has been restored):
operation. Lock is engaged.
Push the lock button on the electronic
Note: Changes or modifications not key
expressly approved by the party
24
Push the unlock button on the door SEATS
panel The front seats can be adjusted to ensure
Unlock drivers door lock with the maximum comfort for the occupants.
emergency key When adjusting the drivers seat, keep
the shoulders resting firmly against the
Operate the internal door handle backrest, and the wrists within reach of
Note: For the rear doors, if the Child the top of the steering wheel. The driver
Safety Locks are engaged, and the must also be able to fully press the brake
previously described locking procedure is pedal.
carried out, operating the internal handle
will not open the door. Instead, it will only 04066S0002EM
realign the lock release device. To open Warning! Manual Seat Adjustment
the door, the outside handle must be
used. The door central locking/unlocking 1 Adjustment Lever
buttons are not deactivated when the It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, 2 Height Adjustment Button
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
emergency lock is engaged. 3 Recline Lever
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of Height Adjustment
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats Push the height adjustment button
and seat belts. In a collision, people riding in upward or downward to obtain your
these areas are more likely to be seriously desired height.
injured or killed.
Seatback Recline
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly. To adjust the seatback, lift the recline
lever located on the outboard side of the
seat, lean back to the desired position
Sparco Racing Seats If Equipped and release the lever. To return the
Forward/Rearward Adjustment seatback, lift the lever, lean forward and
The adjustment lever is at the front of the release the lever.
seat, near the floor. Pull the bar upward Power Seats If Equipped
to move the seat forward or rearward. The power seat switches are located on
Release the bar once the seat is in the the outboard side of the seat near the
desired position. Using body pressure, floor. Use these switches to move the
move forward and rearward on the seat driver's seat up, down, forward, rearward,
to be sure that the seat adjusters have or to recline the seatback.
latched.
25
Seatback Recline
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

The angle of the seatback can be


adjusted forward or rearward. Push the
seatback switch in the desired direction,
and the seat will move in the direction of
the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position is reached.
Power Lumbar
The power lumbar switch is located on
the outboard side of the power seat. Push
04066S0003EM
the switch forward or rearward to 04066S0015EM
Power Seat Adjustment increase or decrease the lumbar support. Seatback Width Adjustment
1 Seat Adjustment Push the switch upward or downward to 4 Power Adjustable Bolster Buttons
2 Recline Adjustment raise or lower the lumbar support. 5 Driver Memory Seat Buttons
3 Lumbar Adjustment Height Adjustment
The height of the seats can be adjusted Seat Cushion Extension If Equipped
up or down. Pull upward or push Lift the adjustment lever and push the
downward on the seat switch, and the front of the cushion forward or backward
Caution! seat will move in the direction of the to extend the cushion by a few inches
switch. Release the switch when the (centimeters).
Do not place any article under a power seat desired position is reached.
or impede its ability to move as it may cause Seat Angle Adjustment (Tilting)
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel
may become limited if movement is stopped The seat angle can be adjusted in four
by an obstruction in the seat's path. directions. Lift or push the front part of
seat switch to move the front part of the
seat in the corresponding direction.
Forward/Rearward Adjustment Release the seat switch when the seat
Push the seat switch forward or rearward has reached the desired position.
to adjust to your desired position.
Power Bolster Adjustment
Push the power bolster adjustment
04066S0017EM
buttons to regulate the width of the Seat Cushion Extension
backrest through the lateral padding.
6 Adjustment Lever

26
Driver Memory Seat Do not ride with the seatback reclined so You can select three heating levels:
Storing and recalling can be done with the that the shoulder belt is no longer resting Maximum three orange indicators
ignition in the ON mode, vehicle speed at against your chest. In a collision you could illuminated on the buttons.
0 mph (0 km/h), and the drivers side door slide under the seat belt, which could result
closed, or for three minutes after having in serious injury or death. Average two orange indicators
opened the driver's side door. An audible illuminated on the buttons.
chime is heard to confirm a memory Heated Seats If Equipped Minimum one orange indicator
profile is set or recalled. To set a memory Note: If your vehicle is equipped with illuminated on the buttons.
profile, first adjust your seat (and power Sparco Racing Seats, they will not be
mirror position if desired) until you are in After selecting a heating level, heat will
equipped with the heated seat feature. be felt within a few minutes.
the desired position. Then, push the
memory button you want to assign the With the engine in the ON position, push A quick push of the heated seat button
set position to for 1.5 seconds. When a the driver or passenger heated seat will select the heat levels in order of
new seat position is memorized, the button located on the instrument highest to lowest. A fourth push of the
previously memorized position on the panel. button will turn the heated seat off.
same button is automatically The minimum setting is automatically
overwritten. Recalling a memorized deactivated once a certain period of time
position can also be done for has elapsed. This varies on a
approximately three minutes after the case-by-case basis, in accordance with
doors are opened and for approximately the specific operating conditions.
one minute after the engine is stopped.
To recall a memorized position, push the Rear Heated Seats
assigned button briefly. If equipped with rear heated seats, the
controls can be found on the rear of the
center console and will function the same
Warning! as the front heated seat controls.
04066S0004EM
Heated Seat Buttons Note: To preserve the battery charge,
this function cannot be activated when
Adjusting a seat while driving may be the engine is off.
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
could result in loss of control which could
cause a collision and serious injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before
fastening the seat belts and while the
vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death
could result from a poorly adjusted seat
belt.

27
HEAD RESTRAINTS
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Warning! Head restraints are designed to reduce


the risk of injury by restricting head
movement in the event of a rear impact.
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
Head restraints should be adjusted so
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, that the top of the head restraint is
medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other located above the top of your ear.
physical condition must exercise care when
using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used Warning!
for long periods of time. 04066S0006EM

Do not place anything on the seat or Rear Seat


seatback that insulates against heat, such A loose head restraint thrown forward in
The seats and the seatbelts are a collision or hard stop could cause serious
as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the considered as components of the
seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
protection system for the vehicle's Always securely stow removed head
that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface occupants. restraints in a location outside the occupant
temperature of the seat. Note: Refer to the "Seat Belt Systems" compartment.
in "Safety" for further information. ALL the head restraints MUST be
reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect
Rear Seats the occupants. Follow the re-installation
The rear seats allow for three instructions above prior to operating the
passengers. vehicle or occupying a seat.
Note: Because the rear seat is designed Do not place items over the top of the
as a 4+1 seat, the middle seat is of Reactive Head Restraint, such as coats,
limited use. It is recommended that this seat covers or portable DVD players. These
seat only be used by a person who can items may interfere with the operation of
use the backrest as a substitute for the the Reactive Head Restraint in the event of
head restraint. a collision and could result in serious injury
or death.

Sparco Racing Seat Head Restraints


If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with
non-adjustable head restraints on the
driver's and passenger's seatbacks.

28
The non-adjustable head restraints Note: To allow maximum visibility for the
consist of a trimmed foam covering over driver, if the head restraints are not in
the upper structure of the seatbacks and use, lower the head restraint all the way.
are intended to help protect you and the
Rear Head Restraints (Adjustments)
passenger from neck injury.
Adjust the seatbacks to their upright,
on-road positions so that the head Warning!
restraint is positioned as close as
possible to the back of your head.
All occupants, including the driver, should
Front Head Restraints (Adjustments)
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicles seat
If Equipped until the head restraints are placed in their
04076S0002EM

proper positions in order to minimize the


Rear Head Restraint
The front head restraints may be
height-adjustable. To adjust them, risk of neck injury in the event of a crash. 1 Adjustment Button
operate as follows: Head restraints should never be adjusted 2 Release Button
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
Upward adjustment: Raise the head vehicle with the head restraints improperly
restraint until it clicks into place. adjusted or removed could cause serious Note: To allow maximum visibility for the
injury or death in the event of a collision. driver, if the head restraints are not in
Downward adjustment: Push the
use, lower the head restraint all the way.
adjustment button and push downward
on the head restraint to lower. The height of the outboard head Head Restraints (Removal)
restraints can be adjusted. The head To remove the head restraints, proceed
restraint of the center seat, if equipped, as follows:
Warning! can only be removed. The height cannot
be adjusted. 1. Raise the head restraints to their
For upward adjustment, pull up on the maximum height.
All occupants, including the driver, should head restraint until it clicks into place.
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicles seat 2. Push the adjustment button and the
until the head restraints are placed in their For downward adjustment, push in the release button at the side of the two
proper positions in order to minimize the adjustment button and lower the head supports.
risk of neck injury in the event of a crash. restraint while holding the button to the
desired height. 3. Remove the head restraints by pulling
Head restraints should never be adjusted them upwards.
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision.

29
To reinstall the head restraints, proceed STEERING WHEEL
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

as follows:
Adjustments
1. Hold down both the adjustment
This feature allows you to tilt the
button and release button while placing
steering column upward or downward. It
the head restraint post into the holes.
also allows you to lengthen or shorten the
2. Then, reposition the head restraint to steering column. The tilt/telescoping
the appropriate height for the lever is located below the steering wheel
passengers. at the end of the steering column.

Warning!

A loose head restraint thrown forward in


a collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head
restraints in a location outside the occupant
compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be
reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect
the occupants. Follow the re-installation
instructions above prior to operating the 04086S0001EM
vehicle or occupying a seat. Steering Wheel Adjustment
1 Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle
A Open
B Closed

30
Heated Steering Wheel If Equipped
Warning! Note: If your vehicle is equipped with Warning!
Sparco Racing Seats, the Heated
Steering Wheel feature will not be
Do not adjust the steering column while available. Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
driving. Adjusting the steering column while While the engine is running, push the skin because of advanced age, chronic
driving or driving with the steering column illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury,
heated steering wheel button on the
unlocked, could cause the driver to lose medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other
control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this instrument panel. physical conditions must exercise care when
warning may result in serious injury or death. using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures,
especially if used for long periods.
To Adjust The Position:
Do not place anything on the steering
1. Pull the Tilt/Telescoping Control wheel that insulates against heat, such as a
Handle down to the open position. blanket or steering wheel covers of any type
and material. This may cause the steering
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the wheel heater to overheat.
desired position.
3. Lock the desired position by pushing
the Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle to 04086S0002EM
the closed position. Heated Steering Wheel Button
When the function is enabled, the
Warning! indicator on the button will illuminate.

It is absolutely forbidden to carry out any


after-market operation involving steering
system or steering column modifications
(e.g. installation of anti-theft device) that
could adversely affect performance. Doing
so could void the New Vehicle Limited
Warrant, cause SERIOUS SAFETY
PROBLEMS INCLUDING INJURY, and also
result in the vehicle not meeting
type-approval requirements.

31
MIRRORS Outside Power Mirrors To adjust the selected mirror, push the
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

knob in the direction desired.


Electrochromic Mirror Power Adjustment
Note: Once adjustment is complete,
This mirror automatically adjusts for The power mirrors can be adjusted with
rotate the knob to the neutral position to
headlight glare from vehicles behind you. the ignition ON.
prevent accidental movements.
The electrochromic mirror has a power Select the desired mirror using the power
mirror control. Power Folding
button to activate/deactivate the
automatic dimming/anti-glaring function. With the power mirror control knob in the
neutral position, move it to the power
folding position. Move the knob again to
return the mirrors to the driving position.
If the power mirror control knob is moved
again during door mirror folding (from
closed to open position and vice versa),
the movement direction is reversed.
Automatic Activation
Activating the central door locking
04106S0004EM system from outside the vehicle
Power Mirror Control automatically folds the mirrors. The
04106S0002EM
mirrors return to the driving position
Electrochromic Mirror Power Button 1 Power Mirror Control Knob when the vehicle is then unlocked.
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the A Left If the door mirrors were folded using the
automatic dimming feature is B Right power mirror control knob, they can only
deactivated. C Power Folding Position be returned to the driving position by
D Neutral rotating the knob again.
Note: The power folding operation can
be enabled only when the vehicle speed is
lower than 31 mph (50 km/h). They can
only be manually controlled up to that
speed.

32
Automatic Dimming Mirrors EXTERIOR LIGHTS The exterior lights can be activated only
Like the electrochromic mirror, an when the ignition is in the ON position,
Headlight Switch except for the parking lights. Refer to
automatic dimming feature is also
available on the outside rear view mirrors The headlight switch is located to the left "Parking Lights" in this section for more
to prevent glare. The automatic dimming of the steering wheel on the instrument information.
button is the same for all rear view panel. This switch controls the operation The instrument panel and the various
mirrors. of the headlights, parking lights, controls on the dashboard will be
instrument panel lights, instrument panel illuminated when the exterior lights are
light dimming, interior lights and rear fog turned on.
Warning! lights.
In addition, there are buttons for parking Automatic Headlights
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside sensors deactivation and stop/start. This system automatically turns the
convex mirror will look smaller and farther Refer to Starting And Operating for headlights on or off according to ambient
away than they really are. Relying too much further information. light levels.
on side convex mirrors could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Function Activation
Use your inside mirror when judging the size From the O (off) position, turn the light
or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex switch to the (AUTO) position.
mirror.
Note: The function can only operate with
the ignition position cycled to ON.
Heated Mirrors
Function Deactivation
Push the rear defrost button in the To deactivate the function, turn the light
climate controls to activate the heated switch to a position other than the
mirrors. (AUTO) position.
04126S0001NA
Headlight Switch Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
With the ignition cycled to ON, and the
1 Parking Sensors Deactivation But- light switch turned to the position, if
ton the dusk sensor detects sufficient
2 Parking Light, Daylight Running external light, the Daytime Running
Lights, Headlight Switch Lights will turn on automatically while the
3 Instrument Panel Dimmer other lights remain off.
4 Rear Fog Light Button If the turn signals are operated, the
5 Stop/Start Button brightness of the corresponding Daytime
Running Lights will be decreased as long
as the turn signals are on.
33
The DRL can be activated/deactivated the multifunction lever (located on the Function Deactivation
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

from the Information and Entertainment left side of the steering wheel) to the side This function is deactivated by turning on
System, by selecting the following that you want to remain on. With the the headlights, the side lights, or by
functions in sequence on the main MENU: parking lights on, the warning light on cycling the ignition to ON.
the instrument panel will illuminate.
1. Settings. Adaptive Frontlight System (AFS
Note: Cycling the ignition to ON turns off
Function) If Equipped
2. Lights. the parking lights, which were only
illuminated on one side. This is a system combined with Xenon
3. Daytime Running Lights. headlights (Bi-Xenon 35 W headlamp if
Headlight Off Delay equipped) which directs the headlights
Note: The Daytime Running Lights horizontally, and continuously and
cannot be deactivated in Canadian The Headlight Off Delay function delays
the turning off of the headlights for a set automatically adapts them to the driving
markets. conditions around bends or when
time when the ignition is cycled OFF.
Rear Fog Light cornering.
The function can be activated from the
Information and Entertainment System The system directs the headlights to light
The rear fog light switch is integrated
by selecting the following functions in up the road in the best way, taking into
with the headlight switch.
sequence on the main menu: account the speed of the vehicle and the
Push the button to turn the rear fog bend or corner angle, as well as the speed
lights on/off. 1. Settings. of steering.
The rear fog lights turn on only when the The adaptive lights are automatically
headlights or parking lights are turned on. 2. Lights.
activated when the vehicle is started.
The lights can be turned off by pushing 3. Headlight Off Delay.
the button again or by turning the High Beam Headlights
The side lights and the headlights stay on To activate the fixed high beam
headlight switch to the O (off) position. for a time that can be set between 30,
When the engine is stopped with the rear headlights, push the multifunction lever,
60, and 90 seconds. located on the left side of the steering
fog lights on, they will remain off the next
time the engine is started. Function Activation wheel, towards the instrument panel. The
With the headlights on, cycle the ignition headlight switch must be turned to the
Parking Lights to STOP, the timer will then start. (AUTO) or (ON) position.
With the ignition in the STOP position, Note: To activate this function, the With high beam headlights on, the
turn the headlight switch to the headlights must be deactivated within High Beam Indicator on the
position to turn the parking lights on. two minutes after the ignition has been instrument panel will illuminate.
All of the parking lights will turn on for cycled to STOP.
eight minutes, and opening the door
activates an audible warning.
To leave only the lights on one side
(right/left) illuminated, you must move
34
This function is enabled with the Turn Signals
Information and Entertainment System, To activate the turn signals function,
and can only be activated with the light move the multifunction lever, located on
switch turned to (AUTO). the left side of the steering wheel, up or
If the high beam headlights are on, the down until it reaches the detent. Moving
blue icon/warning light will illuminate the lever upward flashes the right turn
in the instrument panel. signal and moving the lever downward
When the speed is higher than 37 mph will flash the left turn signal.
(60 km/h) and the function is active, the The or turn signal will blink on the
lights will turn off if the multifunction instrument panel.
04126S0020EM lever is pushed again. The turn signals turn off automatically
Multifunction Lever When the speed is lower than 15 mph when the vehicle is brought back onto a
The high beam headlights are turned off (25 km/h) and the function is active, the straight course.
by pulling the lever to its original position. function switches the high beam
Lane Change Function
The warning light/icon will turn off in headlights off.
Tap the lever up or down once, without
the instrument panel when the headlights If the high beam headlights are operated
moving beyond the detent, and the turn
are turned off. quickly again (pushing the multifunction
signal (right or left) will flash five times.
lever towards the instrument panel), the
Flashing The Headlights Then, the turn signal (right or left) will
warning light/icon will illuminate in the
Pulling the multifunction lever toward the automatically turn off.
instrument panel, and the high beam
steering wheel will activate the high headlights will turn on constantly until To turn off the flashing before the end of
beam headlights manually. The lights will the speed exceeds 37 mph (60 km/h). the cycle, move the lever in the opposite
remain on as long as the lever is held. direction until the first click (about half
When the speed of 37 mph (60 km/h) is
Once the lever is released, the lights will way).
exceeded again, the automatic
resume the previous position. functioning is reactivated.
Automatic High Beam Headlights If If the multifunction lever is pushed again
Equipped with the Automatic High Beam
The Automatic High Beam Headlights Headlights activated, the Automatic High
system provides increased forward Beam Headlights function deactivates.
lighting at night by automating high beam To deactivate the automatic headlight
control through the use of a digital function, rotate the headlight switch to
camera mounted on the windshield. This the position.
camera detects vehicle specific light and Note: If the system recognizes heavy
automatically switches from high beams traffic areas, the automatic functions
to low beams until the approaching remain disabled independently of the
vehicle is out of view. vehicles speed.
35
Static Bending Light Function (SBL) INTERIOR LIGHTS being drained once the doors are closed.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

If Equipped If a light is left on accidently, the


Front Map Reading Lights overhead lights turn off automatically
The SBL function utilizes Light Emitting
Diodes (LEDs) in order to better The front map/reading and overhead approximately 15 minutes after the
illuminate the street and increase the lights are mounted in the overhead engine has been turned OFF.
light angle while turning. This function is console. Each light can be turned on by Overhead Light Timing
enabled by rotating the light switch to pushing the corresponding switch on the
console. These switches are backlit for To assist getting in and out of the vehicle
position or (AUTO). The SBL LEDs
night time visibility. To turn the lights off, at night or in poorly-lit areas, two timed
activate when the speed is below 25 mph
push the switch a second time. modes are available to keep the interior
(40 km/h).
lighting on after the engine is cycled OFF.
This function can be activated/
Timing While Getting Into The Vehicle
deactivated on the Information and
Entertainment System by selecting the The overhead lights will illuminate as
following functions in sequence on the follows:
main menu: For a few seconds when the doors are
1. Settings. unlocked.
For approximately three minutes when
2. Lights.
one of the doors is opened.
3. Cornering Lights. For a few seconds when the doors are
04136S0001EM
locked.
Overhead Console Timing is interrupted when the ignition is
1 Drivers Reading/Map Light Switch cycled to ON.
2 Rear Overhead Lights Switch Exiting Overhead Light Timing
3 Overhead Lights Switch The overhead lights will turn off as
4 Front Map Reading Lights Switch follows:
5 Passengers Reading/Map Light After all doors are closed upon
Switch entering the vehicle, the three minute
6 Passengers Reading/Map Light timer will stop and a second timer will
7 Center Reading/Map Light start for the overhead lights. This timing
8 Drivers Reading/Map Light will end when the ignition is cycled to ON.
When the doors are locked (either with
Note: Before getting out of the vehicle, key fob or with key inserted on drivers
ensure that the overhead lights are off. side door).
This will prevent the battery level from
36
After 15 minutes to preserve the The courtesy light turns on automatically Door Light
battery. by lifting the cover.
This vehicle is equipped with door courtesy
Timing While Getting Out Of The Glove Compartment Light lamps that illuminate the entry way for the
Vehicle This light turns on automatically when the driver or passenger when the door is
After cycling the ignition to STOP, the glove compartment is opened and turns opened, and turns off when it is closed.
overhead lights will turn on as follows: off when it is closed. The light turns on and off regardless of
For a few seconds after the engine The light turns on and off regardless of the ignition status.
stops. the ignition status.
For approximately three minutes when
one of the doors is opened.
For a few seconds when the last door
is closed.
The timing ends automatically when the
doors are locked.
Vanity Mirror Lights
On the driver and passenger sun visor, 04136S0007EM
there is a light which illuminates the sun Door Light
04136S0003EM
visor mirror when folded down. Glove Compartment Light As part of the "Passive Entry" system,
Interior Ambient Lighting another light can be found under each
The brightness of the interior lighting can exterior door handle.
be adjusted via the Information and
Entertainment System.
To access the adjustment function, on the
main menu select the following items in
sequence:
1. "Settings."

04136S0002EM
2. "Interior Ambient Lighting."
Sun Visor Mirror 3. "Lights."
1 Sun Visor Mirror Cover The lights can be adjusted to seven 04136S0005EM
different levels of brightness. Exterior Door Handle Light
37
Rear Overhead Light WINDSHIELD WIPERS
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

The rear overhead lights are activated or Windshield Wiper Stalk


deactivated by two on/off switches
located within the lights on the ceiling The windshield wiper stalk is located on
above the rear seats. the right side of the steering wheel.
The windshield wipers will only operate
with the ignition cycled to ON.

Caution!

04136S0006EM
Courtesy Trunk Lights Turn the windshield wipers off when
The courtesy lights will turn on and off driving through an automatic car wash.
regardless of the ignition status. Damage to the windshield wipers may result
if the wiper control is left in any position
Note: If the trunk is left open, the lights other than off.
will automatically turn off after
04136S0004EM
15 minutes to preserve battery life. In cold weather, always turn off the wiper
Rear Overhead Light switch and allow the wipers to return to the
1 Passenger Rear Overhead Light Instrument Panel Dimmer Control Park position before turning off the
2 Driver Rear Overhead Light With the daytime running lights or engine. If the wiper switch is left on and the
3 Driver Rear Overhead Light Switch headlights on, rotate the dimmer control wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to
upward to increase the instrument panel the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle
4 Passenger Rear Overhead Light is restarted.
brightness and the control button icons.
Switch Rotate the dimmer control downward to Always remove any buildup of snow that
decrease brightness. prevents the windshield wiper blades from
The light turns on when a door is opened. returning to the off position. If the
Note: The light will turn off windshield wiper control is turned off and
automatically after a few minutes if a the blades cannot return to the off position,
door is left open. To turn it on again, open damage to the wiper motor may occur.
another door or close and reopen the
same door.
Courtesy Trunk Lights
The trunk features two courtesy lights.
These courtesy lights turn on
automatically when the trunk is opened 04126S0055EM
and turn off when it is closed. Dimmer Control
38
Windshield Wiper/Washers Rain Sensors
Rotating the switch to the position, Warning!
activates the first, less sensitive level of
the Rain Sensing function.
Rotating the switch to the position, Sudden loss of visibility through the
activates the second, more sensitive windshield could lead to a collision. You
might not see other vehicles or other
level of the Rain Sensing function. Refer
obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the
to Rain Sensor in this section for more windshield during freezing weather, warm
information on how this system the windshield with the defroster before and
functions. during windshield washer use.
Windshield Washer Operation
04146S0001EM Pull the stalk toward the steering wheel Rain Sensor
Windshield Wiper Switch to operate the windshield washer. The Rain Sensor is located behind the
Operation: The switch on the wiper Keep the stalk pulled to activate both the interior rear view mirror. This feature
stalk can be set to the following windshield washer jet and the windshield senses moisture on the windshield and
positions: wiper with a single movement. The wipers automatically activates the wipers for
and washers will continue to operate until the driver.
Windshield Wiper Off.
you let go of the stalk.
Low Sensitivity Rain Sensing.
The windshield wiper stops working three
High Sensitivity Rain Sensing. strokes after the stalk is released,
Low Continuous Wiper Speed. followed by a final stroke six seconds
High Continuous Wiper Speed. later to complete the cycle.
Windshield Wiper Operation Mist
Rotating the switch to the position Use this feature when weather
activates the first (low) level continuous conditions make occasional usage of the
speed of the windshield wipers in manual wipers necessary. Push the stalk upward
mode. to the MIST position and release for a
Rotating the switch to the position single wiping cycle. This function is useful 04146S0002EM

activates the second (high) level to remove small deposits of dust from Rain Sensor
continuous speed of the windshield the windshield or morning dew.
The feature is especially useful for road
wipers in manual mode. Note: This function does not activate the splash or over spray from the windshield
windshield washer. To spray windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate the
washer fluid onto the windshield, the end of the multifunction lever to one of
washing function must be used. four settings to activate this feature.
39
The sensor has an adjustment range that Deactivation CLIMATE CONTROL
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

varies progressively from wiper still (no Use the wiper switch or cycle the ignition
stroke) when the windshield is dry, to Passenger Compartment Air Vents
to STOP.
wiper at continuous speed (fast In the event of malfunction of the rain Side Air Vents
operation) with intense rain. sensor while it is active, the windshield To adjust the position of the Side Air
Activation wiper operates intermittently at a speed Vents, move the Side Air Vent Adjuster
Rotating the wiper switch to position consistent with the sensitivity setting of (2) in any direction.
or activates the rain sensor. the rain sensor, whether or not there is Rotate the Side Air Vent Adjuster (2)
rain on the glass for as long as the sensor
The activation of the rain sensor system to adjust the air flow. Rotating the Side
failure is indicated on the display.
is done by tapping the wiper stalk Air Vent Adjuster (2) clockwise will close
upwards while the switch is in the or The sensor continues to operate and it is
the vent. Rotating it counterclockwise
position. possible to set the windshield wiper to
continuous mode or . The failure will open the vent.
The variation in sensitivity during rain
indication remains on for as long as the
sensor operation is also signaled by a
sensor is active.
stroke of the wiper (command acquired
and implemented). This stroke is also The rain sensor is able to recognize and
executed with the windshield dry. automatically adjust itself in the
presence of the following conditions:
If the windshield washer is used with the
rain sensor activated, the normal washing Presence of dirt on the controlled
cycle is performed, after which the rain surface (e.g. salt, dirt, etc.).
sensor resumes its normal automatic
Presence of streaks of water caused
operation.
by the worn window wiper blades.
Note: Keep the glass in the sensor area
clean. Difference between day and night. 04156S0002EM
Side Air Vents
1 Demister Air Vents
2 Side Air Vent Adjuster

40
Central Air Vents Rear Air Vents
To adjust the position of the Central To adjust the position of the Rear Air
Air Vents, move the Central Air Vent Vents, move the Rear Air Vent Adjuster
Adjuster (2) up or down. (2) in any direction.
Rotate the Central Air Vent Air Flow Rotate the Rear Air Vent Adjuster (2)
Adjuster (3) to adjust the air flow. to adjust the air flow. Rotating the Rear
Rotating Central Air Vent Air Flow Air Vent Adjuster (2) clockwise will close
Adjuster (3) up will open the vents, the vent. Rotating it counterclockwise
allowing for maximum airflow. Rotating it will open the vent.
down will close the vents.

04156S0004EM

04156S0003EM Rear Air Vents


Central Air Vents 1 Adjustable Rear Air Vents
1 Adjustable Central Air Vents 2 Rear Air Vent Adjuster
2 Central Air Vent Adjuster
3 Central Air Vent Air Flow Adjuster
4 Windshield Front Defroster Vent

41
Automatic Dual-Zone Climate Control System
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Controls

04156V0005EM
Automatic Climate Control System
1 Driver Temperature Adjustment 6 Rear Defrost Button 11 Passenger Heated Seat Button
Knob If Equipped
2 Driver Side AUTO Button (Auto- 7 Passenger Side Air Distribution 12 Air Conditioning Button
matic Operation) Selection Button
3 Driver Side Air Distribution Selec- 8 Passenger Side AUTO Button (Au- 13 Steering Wheel Heater Button
tion Button tomatic Operation) If Equipped
4 Max Defrost Button 9 Passenger Temperature Adjust- 14 Driver Side Heated Seat Button
ment Knob If Equipped
5 Blower Speed Adjustment Knob 10 SYNC Button (Set Temperature 15 Air Recirculation Button
Alignment) Driver/Passenger Side

42
Compressor variations (for A/C activation
Caution! cooling/dehumidifying the air) Front Defroster
Air recirculation Air recirculation
The system uses R1234yf refrigerant, which The Climate Control System can also be Rear Defroster
does not pollute the environment in the operated manually by using the buttons System deactivation
event of accidental leakage. Under no and knobs on the faceplate.
circumstances, use R134a and R12 fluids, Manual selections will override the Operating Mode
which are incompatible with the components automatic settings, which are stored until
of this system. The Climate Control system can be
the AUTO button is pushed. If the system activated in different ways. It is
intervenes for safety reasons, the recommended to use the automatic
Description automatic setting will take control of the function. Push the AUTO button and set
system. the desired temperatures.
The Automatic Dual Zone Climate
Control System adjusts the temperature The below operations will not deactivate The automatic system adjusts the
and air distribution independently the automatic (AUTO) function: temperature, quantity, and distribution
between the driver and passenger. Air Recirculation activation/ of air introduced into the passenger
The system maintains the set deactivation compartment. It also controls air
temperature inside the passenger A/C activation/deactivation recirculation and the activation of the air
compartment and compensates for conditioner.
SYNC function activation
outside temperature change. At any time during automatic operation,
Rear Window Defrost activation/ you can change the temperature, activate
Note: The reference temperature is
72 F (22 C) for optimal comfort deactivation or deactivate the Rear Defroster,
management. When in AUTO mode, the vehicles activate SYNC, activate or deactivate
The automatic setting will adjust the internal temperature is controlled the air conditioner, and activate or
following to maintain comfort within the according to the set temperature. deactivate air recirculation. The system
passenger compartment: The following can be manually set or will automatically adjust to the new
adjusted: settings.
Air temperature from the driver/front
passenger side vents Driver/passenger air temperature Climate Control Display Settings
Air distribution from the driver/front Blower speed (continuous variation) The Climate Control settings are visible
passenger side vents Air distribution (seven positions for on the Information and Entertainment
Fan speed (continuous variation of the driver and passenger) System radio screen.
air flow) The display on the Information and
Entertainment System is a pop up
window (1), which is activated by pushing
the buttons or turning the knobs on the
43
Climate Control system. The indicator Rotate the Temperature Adjustment
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Air flow distributed between the


lights located on the number of buttons Knob fully clockwise to engage the HI
floor vents, windshield, and front
and knobs indicate that the selected (maximum heating) setting or fully
feature is on/off. If no operation is counterclockwise to engage the LO side window defrosting/demisting
performed for a predetermined time, the (maximum cooling) setting. To deactivate vents. This distribution setting
pop-up will close on the display. these functions, rotate the Temperature warms the passenger compartment
Adjustment Knob to the desired while preventing the windows from
temperature. fogging up.
Rear passengers temperature is linked Air flow distribution between the
to driver side selection.
windshield demisting/defrosting
Air Distribution Selection vents, and side/central dashboard
Push the Air Distribution Selection vents. This distribution setting
button on the faceplate to change the sends air to the windshield in sunny
mode of air distribution. conditions.
Air flow to the windshield and Air flow distribution to all vents on
0521128655US demister window vents to the vehicle.
1 Climate Control Pop-up Display demist/defrost them. In AUTO mode, the Climate Controls
Air Temperature Adjustment automatically manage the air
Air flow at the central and side
distribution. When set manually, the
Rotate the driver or passenger dashboard vents to ventilate the respective symbols on the Information
Temperature Adjustment Knob clockwise chest and the face. and Entertainment System indicate the
for warmer temperatures or air distribution setting.
Air flow to the front and rear floor
counterclockwise for cooler
temperatures. The set temperatures are vents. This setting heats the Fan Speed Adjustment
shown on the Information and passenger compartment the
Turn the Blower Speed Knob to increase
Entertainment System. quickest. or decrease the blower speed. The speed
Push the SYNC button to sync the driver Air flow distributed between the is displayed with lighted indicators in the
and passenger air temperatures. floor vents (hotter air) and the Information and Entertainment System
Rotate the passenger Temperature central and side dashboard vents display.
Adjustment Knob to cancel the SYNC (cooler air). This air distribution Maximum fan speed = all indicators
function. This will set a new passenger setting is useful on sunny days illuminated on the Information and
side temperature. Entertainment System display
during spring and autumn.

44
Minimum fan speed = one indicator SYNC Button Enabling The Air Quality System (AQS)
illuminated on the Information and Function If Equipped
Push the SYNC button (indicator
Entertainment System display illuminated) to sync the passenger side When the automatic recirculation
air temperature with the driver side air function is selected, the AQS function
The fan can be turned off by rotating the
temperature. automatically activates internal air
Blower Speed Knob counterclockwise to
recirculation when the outside air is
the off position (all segments on the This function makes temperature
polluted (e.g. in heavy traffic and tunnels).
Information and Entertainment System regulation easier when the driver is
display are turned off). traveling alone. At low external temperatures or in high
humidity, the automatic function turns
Note: To restore automatic control of Turn the passenger Temperature
off to avoid fogging up the windows. The
the fan speed, push the AUTO button. Adjustment Knob or push the passenger
user can select the function again by
side Air Distribution Selection Button to
AUTO Button pushing the Air Recirculation Button.
change the passenger side air
When the AUTO button is pushed temperature and return to separate air In automatic operation, air recirculation
(indicator illuminated), the Climate temperature management. will be controlled by the system
Control system automatically adjusts the according to outside environmental
Air Recirculation And Air Quality conditions.
following settings:
System (AQS)
Quantity and distribution of air flow in Note:
the passenger compartment Air Recirculation is managed according to
the following operating mode: With the AQS function active and
The air conditioner after the internal air recirculation
Automatic engagement: indicator is
Air recirculation system has been functioning for a set
illuminated above the A on the Air
Cancels any manual settings amount of time, the Climate Control
Recirculation Button System enables air intake to cycle the
Selecting the AUTO function illuminates Forced activation (air circulation air in the passenger compartment for a
the indicator on the A/C button . always activated): indicator illuminated set time. The AQS function is disabled
If air distribution or the fan speed is above the icon on the Air during the air changes.
manual adjusted, the AUTO button Recirculation Button The engagement of the recirculation
indicator will turn off to indicate that the Forced deactivation (air recirculation system makes it possible to reach the
Climate Control system is no longer in required heating or cooling conditions
always off with intake of outside air):
AUTO mode. faster. It is, however, inadvisable to use
both indicators not illuminated on the Air
After a manual adjustment, push the it on rainy/cold days as it can increase
Recirculation Button
AUTO button to resume the automatic the possibility of the windows fogging.
system. The three operating conditions are When the outside temperature is low,
obtained by pushing the Air Recirculation recirculation is forced off to prevent the
Button in sequence. windows from fogging up.

45
A/C Compressor While in MAX-DEF function, the air off. To reactive the Rear Defroster, push
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

conditioner will: the Rear Defroster button.


Push the A/C button to activate or
deactivate the A/C compressor (indicator Activate the air conditioner Note: To avoid damage, do not apply
illuminated when activated). The A/C compressor when the weather allows stickers over the interior heating
compressor will remain off even after the Turn air recirculation off filaments of the Rear Defroster.
engine has stopped. Set the maximum air temperature (HI) Humidity Sensor
When the A/C compressor is turned off, on both the driver and passenger side The Humidity Sensor helps to prevent the
the system deactivates air recirculation
Activate a blower speed based on the windows from fogging up. The AUTO
to prevent the windows from fogging up.
temperature of the engine coolant function (indicator illuminated) must be
If the climate control system can
on for the Humidity Sensor to function.
maintain the temperature, with the A/C Adjust the air flow towards the
turned off, the AUTO feature will remain windshield and front side windows When outside temperature is low, the
on and the AUTO button indicator light system may turn the compressor on and
Activate the Rear Window Defroster turn air recirculation off for safer driving.
will not switch off.
Display the fan speed (indicators
To restore automatic control of the A/C Switching Off/On The Climate Control
compressor, push the A/C button or the illuminated) and current air distribution System
AUTO button. With the A/C compressor setting
Switching Off The Climate Control
off, the air speed can be set manually Note: The MAX-DEF function remains System
using the Air Speed Adjustment Knob. active for approximately three minutes
Rotate the Air Speed Adjustment Knob
When the A/C compressor is on, and the once the engine coolant reaches the
completely counterclockwise to turn off
engine is running, air speed cannot be proper temperature.
the Climate Control System.
lower than the minimum speed (only one When the function is on, AUTO mode will
indicator light is lit). With the air conditioner off:
deactivate. The only manual operations
Note: When the A/C is off the Climate possible are adjusting blower speed and Air recirculation is on
Control system can not produce air that turning off the Rear Window Defroster. The A/C compressor is off
is colder than the current outside Pushing the button switches off the The fan is off
temperature. Under certain MAX-DEF function.
environmental conditions, windows could The heated rear window can be
fog up rapidly, since the air is not Rear Defroster activated/deactivated
dehumidified. Push the Rear Defroster button to Note: The climate control system stores
Front Defroster And MAX-DEF activate (indicators illuminated) the Rear the previously set temperatures and
Function Defroster. resumes operation when any button on
The Rear Defroster will turn off after the system is pushed.
Push the Front Defroster button 20 minutes or once the engine is turned
(indicator illuminated) to defrost the
windshield and side windows.
46
Switching On The Climate Control control system will continue to maintain POWER WINDOWS
System the temperature while the engine is off.
By deactivating the Stop/Start system Power Window Switches
To switch the climate control system on
in automatic mode, push the AUTO with the button located on the The power window switches work with
button. dashboard, the climate control system the ignition in the ON position and for
will take priority over the engine shutting three minutes after the ignition has been
Stop/Start off. placed in the STOP position. When one of
The climate control system manages the the front doors is opened, this operation
Note:
Stop/Start system. Stop/Start has the is disabled.
engine shut off when vehicle speed is In harsh climate conditions, limit the Driver Side Front Door Controls
0 mph (0 km/h) to maintain comfort use of the Stop/Start system to prevent The switches are located on the door
within the vehicle. the compressor from continuously panel trim. All windows can be controlled
Stop/Start will deactivate in the switching on and off. This will cause from the driver side door panel.
following scenarios: rapid misting of the windows and the
accumulation of humidity in the
The climate control system is in AUTO
passenger compartment.
mode (indicator illuminated), and the
vehicle has yet to reach the set When the Stop/Start system is on,
temperature the climate control system will always
take air in from outside, reducing the
The climate control system is in LO probability of the windows fogging up.
maximum cooling
The climate control system is in HI System Maintenance
maximum heating In winter, the Climate Control System
The climate control system is in the must be turned on at least once a month
04166S0001EM
MAX-DEF status for approximately ten minutes. Power Window Switches
Have the system inspected at an
When the Stop/Start system is active, authorized dealer before the summer. 1 Front Left 4 Window
the engine will restart if the inside Window Switch Lockout Switch
temperature changes significantly, or if 2 Front Right 5 Rear Left
the LO setting, or MAX-DEF setting, is Window Switch Window Switch
activated. 3 Rear Right
With Stop/Start system on, air flow is Window Switch
reduced to keep the compartment
comfort conditions for longer.
Until the temperature drastically
changes within the cabin, the climate
47
Window Opening This device is also useful if the windows HOOD
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Push the buttons to open the desired are activated accidentally by children
inside the vehicle. Opening
window.
Each button has two position steps. Push The anti-pinch safety function is To open the hood, proceed as follows:
gently (first position step) for manual activated both during the manual and the
1. Pull the release lever located on the
"burst" window travel, while pushing the automatic operation of the window.
drivers side kick panel.
same button harder (second position When the anti-pinch system is activated,
step) activates "continuous automatic" the window closing is immediately
operation. interrupted. Then the window closing is
If the button is pushed again, the window automatically reversed and the window
will stop in the desired position. lowers by about eight inches (20 cm) in
Window Closing relation to the first stop position. The
window cannot be operated during this
Pull the window switch up to move the time.
window upward. Hold the switch for at
least half of a second and the window will Note: In the event of an error, or if the
go up automatically. anti-pinch protection is activated three
consecutive times, the automatic closing
To stop the window during Auto-Up operation of the window will be 04196S0001EM
operation, push or pull the window switch deactivated. In order to restore the Hood Release Lever
again. correct operation of the system, the 2. Go to the outside of the vehicle and
Passenger Side Front Door/Rear Door window must be lowered. position yourself in front of the grille.
Controls Power Window System Initialization
There are single window controls on the 3. Lift the hood slightly.
If power supply is interrupted, the
passenger and rear door trim panels electric window automatic operation 4. Move the under-hood latch from right
which operate the door windows. must be reinitialized. to left to release the hood.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch To perform the initialization procedure,
Protection which must be done on each door with the
The vehicle may be equipped with an doors closed, manually fully close the
anti-pinch safety device for closing the window to be initialized.
windows.
If the safety system senses any obstacle
while the window is closing, it will stop
the windows movement and reverse it,
depending on its position.

48
Closing TRUNK
As the hood is extremely light, to close The trunk unlocking is electrically
the hood, lower it to approximately operated and is deactivated when the
16 inches (40 cm) from the engine vehicle is in motion.
compartment then apply a slight
pressure downward and drop the hood. Opening
Make sure that the hood is completely Opening From The Outside
closed and fully latched. If it is not When unlocked, the trunk lid can be
perfectly closed, do not try to push the opened from outside the vehicle using
hood down but open it and repeat the the exterior trunk lid release button
04196S0002EM procedure located between the plate lights. Push
Release Hood Latch To The Left Note: Always check that the hood is the button until you hear a click. The
5. Raise the hood completely. The closed correctly to prevent it from trunk lid can also be opened by quickly
operation is assisted by the addition of opening while the vehicle is traveling. pushing the exterior trunk lid release
two gas props which hold it in the open Since the hood is equipped with a double button on the key fob twice.
position. locking system, one for each side, you
must check that it is closed on both its
Note: side ends.
Do not tamper with the props and
assist the hood while lifting it. Warning!
Use both hands to lift the hood.
Before lifting, check that the windshield Be sure the hood is fully latched before
wiper arms are not raised from the driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully
windshield or in operation, that the latched, it could open when the vehicle is in
vehicle is stationary and that the electric motion and block your vision. Failure to
park brake is engaged. follow this warning could result in serious 04056S0005EM
injury or death. Exterior Trunk Lid Release Button
The turn signal indicators will blink and
the interior lights will turn on when the
trunk lid is opened. They turn off
automatically when the trunk lid is
closed.
The lights turn off automatically after a
few minutes if the trunk lid is left open.

49
Opening From The Inside Pull the lever in the direction indicated by Trunk Initialization
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

When unlocked, the trunk lid can be the arrow to open the trunk lid. The lever Note: If the battery is disconnected or
opened from inside the vehicle using the can be seen in the dark. the protection fuse blows, the trunk lid
interior trunk lid release button, located Closing opening/closing mechanism must be
under the dashboard near the engine re-initialized as follows:
hood opening lever. Push the trunk lid Grip one of the handles and lower the
release button until you hear a click. trunk lid until it clicks. 1. Close all the doors and the trunk lid.
2. Push the lock button on the remote
control.
3. Push the unlock button on the remote
control.
Trunk Specifications
Access To The Tire Service Kit
To access the Tire Service Kit, lift the
carpet in the trunk. For its use, refer to
04206S0003EM
Tire Service Kit in In Case Of
04206S0002EM
Trunk Lid Interior Handles Emergency for further information.
Interior Trunk Lid Release Button
Trunk Lid Emergency Opening Note:
A lever can be found in the trunk lid over It will not be possible to open the
the lock to allow opening from the inside. trunk lid with a key or by pushing the
button in the passenger compartment
when the battery is disconnected. So,
always position the manual trunk lid
opening strap on the trunk lid lock
before disconnecting the battery. Refer
to Storing The Vehicle in Servicing And
Maintenance for the procedure.
04206S0004EM
Cargo Area

04206S0006EM
Emergency Release Button

50
Rear Cargo TieDowns If Equipped INTERNAL EQUIPMENT Sun Visors
There are four hooks inside the trunk for Glove Compartment The sun visors are located at the sides of
attaching the cargo net or cables which the interior rear view mirror. They can be
can safely secure the cargo. To open the glove compartment proceed adjusted forward and toward the side
as follows: window.
1. If equipped with a lock, unlock the To direct the visor toward the side
glove compartment by placing the window, detach the visor from the
emergency key in the lock on the handle. interior rear view mirror side hook and
turn it towards the side window.
2. Pull handle to open the glove
compartment. From this position, the sun visor can also
be extended toward to rear of the vehicle
for additional blockage of sunlight.
Courtesy mirrors with lights are fitted on
the back of the sun visors and can be
04206S0005EM used even in poor light conditions.
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs
Note: Do not apply a load greater than
22 lbs (10 kg) on a single hook.
Cargo Net If Equipped
This is useful for correctly arranging the
cargo and/or for transporting light 04246S0001EM

materials. Opening The Glove Compartment


When the glove compartment is opened,
a light turns on to illuminate the inside of
the compartment. 04246S0002EM
Note: Do not insert large objects that Rotate Sun Visor Toward Passenger
will prevent the glove compartment from Window
closing completely. Always make sure
that the glove compartment is Note: A rear facing child restraint
completely closed when driving. system should never be fitted in the front
passenger seat. Always comply with the
instructions on the sun visor. Refer to
"Child Restraints" in "Safety" for more
information.

51
Homelink The following operation will delete the HomeLink system (keeping the
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

manufactures standard codes and does programmable button pushed down).


Description
not need to be repeated during the
Homelink is a fixed system installed on subsequent button programming: 2. If the indicator does not begin to flash
the vehicle. It can sync up to three quickly, change the distance between the
Push and hold the outer buttons
different devices that activate garage HomeLink and the portable remote
doors, gates, lighting systems, and home (1 and 3). After about ten seconds, the
control and try the procedure again.
or office alarm systems. lighted indicators will start to flash.
Release both buttons. 3. The HomeLink indicator flashes, first
Programming slowly and then quickly. When the
indicator starts to flash quickly, release
both buttons.
Warning!
Using The Homelink System
The HomeLink system activates the
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon garage door or gate motor, just like the
monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your
portable remote control. The car must be
vehicle in the garage while programming the
transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious within the range of the garage door and
injury or death. the ignition must be in the ON position.
Push the programmed button (1, 2 or 3).
Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the 04246S0006NA While the signal is being transmitted, the
universal transceiver. Do not program the Garage Door Opener (Homelink) indicator is lit and the system (garage
transceiver if people, pets or other objects Buttons door, gate, etc.) will respond.
are in the path of the door or gate. Only use 1 Homelink Button 1 If the HomeLink system does not
this transceiver with a garage door opener operate, the original portable remote
that has a stop and reverse feature as 2 Homelink Button 2
3 Homelink Button 3 control may be equipped with an
required by Federal safety standards. This
alternative code (refer to Alternative
includes most garage door opener models 4 Homelink Indicator
manufactured after 1982. Do not use a Code Synchronization).
garage door opener without these safety If necessary, the original remote control
features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, Note: Follow the steps below to begin can still be used to operate the system.
on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety programming your remote control to one
information or assistance. of the HomeLink buttons: Alternative Code Synchronization
To check whether the garage door or gate
1. Push and hold the desired HomeLink motor has an alternative code, proceed
Note: Without starting the engine, button (1, 2 or 3). as follows:
activate the handbrake and place the When the HomeLink indicator begins to
ignition in the ON position. flash slowly, move the portable remote 1. Read the garage door or gate motor
control one to three inches from the manufacturer manual.
52
2. The portable remote control seems to Note: To program Homelink using an Programming A Single Key
have programmed to the HomeLink Alternative Code, the car must be within It is possible to program another original
system, but the garage door or gate can range of the garage door. Activate the remote control on an already
be neither opened or closed. handbrake and turn the ignition to ON, programmed HomeLink key by canceling
without starting the engine. the previously stored frequency.
3. Push the programmed button and
keep it pushed (1, 2 or 3). With an Proceed as follows:
alternative code system, the indicator 1. Locate the Learn or Train button on Warning!
flashes briefly, and then remains off for the garage door or gate motor. The color
two seconds. This sequence is repeated and position may vary depending on the
for 20 seconds. Vehicle exhaust contains carbon
manufacturer (consult the garage door or
monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your
gate manual). Push the Learn or Train vehicle in the garage while programming the
button (this normally activates the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious
Warning!
setting warning light). injury or death.
2. Push the desired HomeLink button (1, Your motorized door or gate will open and
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon close while you are programming the
2 or 3). When the HomeLink indicator
monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your universal transceiver. Do not program the
vehicle in the garage while programming the begins to flash slowly, move the portable
remote control one to three inches from transceiver if people, pets or other objects
transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
injury or death. the HomeLink system (keeping the
this transceiver with a garage door opener
programmable button pushed down). that has a stop and reverse feature as
Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the 3. Within 30 seconds, push the required by Federal safety standards. This
universal transceiver. Do not program the includes most garage door opener models
programmed key (1, 2 or 3) and release it.
transceiver if people, pets or other objects manufactured after 1982. Do not use a
Push the programmed button a second garage door opener without these safety
are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
time and release it to conclude the features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or,
this transceiver with a garage door opener
that has a stop and reverse feature as operation. For some motors, the on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety
required by Federal safety standards. This operation will probably have to be information or assistance.
includes most garage door opener models repeated a third time to end the setting.
manufactured after 1982. Do not use a The motor should now be capable of
garage door opener without these safety
Note: Activate the handbrake and place
recognizing the signal transmitted by the ignition to ON without starting the
features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or,
on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety HomeLink and then open/close the door engine.
information or assistance. or gate.

53
Proceed as follows: 2. Release both keys. responsible for compliance could void the
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

users authority to operate the


1. Push the desired HomeLink button Technical Information For After Sales equipment.
and keep it pushed (1, 2 or 3). Do not Service
release the button until the last If you are unable to set up HomeLink Center Console
operation has been performed. successfully after following the above The center console storage compartment
2. When the HomeLink indicator begins instructions, contact After Sales Service is located between the front seats.
to flash slowly, move the portable remote (HomeLink free hotline number To access the center console storage, lift
control 1 to 3 inches from the system 1-800-355-3515 ) with the following the upper part of the center console as
(keeping the programmable button information: shown below.
pressed down). Vehicle make and model, including
If the indicator does not begin to flash manufacturing year and country of
quickly, change the distance between the purchase;
HomeLink and the portable remote Make, model, age and frequency of use
control and try the procedure again. of the original portable remote control (if
The HomeLink indicator flashes, first known).
slowly and then quickly. When the General Information
indicator starts to flash quickly, release
The following regulatory statement
both buttons on the remote control. applies to all Radio Frequency (RF)
The system previously programmed to devices equipped in this vehicle:
04246S0004EM
HomeLink has now been deleted and the This device complies with Part 15 of the Center Console
new system is ready to use. This does not FCC Rules and with Industry Canada
affect the other two HomeLink buttons in license-exempt RSS standard(s).
any way. Operation is subject to the following two Warning!
Deleting Programmed Keys conditions:
It is recommended to delete HomeLink 1. This device may not cause harmful Do not operate this vehicle with a console
programming before selling the car. interference, and compartment lid in the open position. Driving
All three keys are deleted with the console compartment lid open may
2. This device must accept any result in injury in a collision.
simultaneously. interference received, including
Proceed as follows: interference that may cause undesired
1. Push and hold the outer buttons operation.
(1 and 3). After about ten seconds, the Note: Changes or modifications not
indicator will start to flash. expressly approved by the party

54
Cupholder ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION ACTIVE AERODYNAMICS
Two cupholders are available in the SYSTEMS Carbon Fiber Active Aero Front Spoiler
center console. The following systems are used for This is an automatic device, working at
reducing engine emissions: the vehicle speed, which allows higher
Catalytic Converter reactivity at average speeds and higher
vehicle stability at high speeds,
Oxygen Sensors regulating the air flow into the lower part
Evaporation Control System of the vehicle.
Note: The system is not active in
temperatures near or below zero, or
when the Alfa DNA Pro selector is in the
"Natural" or "Advanced Efficiency"
positions.
04246S0005EM
Cupholders In Center Console
1 Cover

To access the cupholders, slide the cover


forward. To close the compartment, push
the cover and it will close automatically.

04296S0001EM
Front Fascia
If there is a fault, a generic failure icon
will light up on the instrument panel
display, along with a message that will
identify the type of malfunction. See your
authorized dealer if a fault occurs.

55
This page is intentionally left blank

56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

This section gives you all the information INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . .58
you need to understand and use INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY . .60
the instrument panel correctly. WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
ON THE INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . .65
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM . . .85
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS . . . . . .85

57
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Instrument Cluster

05026S0006EM
Instrument Cluster
1. Tachometer
2. Digital Engine Oil Temperature Gauge With Overheating Warning Light
3. Instrument Cluster Display
4. Digital Fuel Level Gauge (The Triangle On The Left Side Of The Symbol Indicates The Side Of The Vehicle With The Fuel Door)
5. Speedometer (Speed Indicator)

58
Tachometer Fuel Level Gauge
The Tachometer indicates the engine The digital fuel gauge monitors the
Revolutions Per Minute (Giri). amount of fuel in the tank.
Adjusting Instrument Panel Lighting When the warning light turns on, a
(Brightness Sensor) message is displayed, and a chime is
sound when 2.38 Gallons (9.0 L) of fuel
Inside the Tachometer there is a light
are left in the tank.
sensor capable of detecting light and
adjusting the brightness of the Note: If the low fuel warning light turns
instrument panel and the Information and on, refuel the vehicle at your nearest fuel
Entertainment System display. station.

Engine Oil Temperature Gauge


Caution!
The digital indicator monitors the
temperature of the engine oil and starts
supplying indications when the oil Do not travel with the fuel tank almost
temperature reaches approximately empty: any gaps in fuel supply could damage
122 F (50C). the catalytic converter.
Under normal usage, the temperature
should remain around the middle of the Speedometer
digital scale according to the working The speedometer shows the vehicle
conditions. speed in miles per hour and/or kilometers
The warning light will turn on to signal per hour (mph/km/h).
the excessive increase of the engine oil
temperature.
In the event of excessive engine oil
temperature, stop the engine
immediately and contact an authorized
dealer.

59
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Instrument Cluster Display Description


This vehicle is equipped with a driver-interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster.
When one or more of the doors have been opened or closed and the ignition is in the OFF position, the instrument cluster will display
the vehicle mileage for a few seconds.
Reconfigurable Instrument Cluster Display
During operation, the instrument cluster display is divided into multiple sections which show driving data, warnings, and failure
indications.

05036S0001QV
Premium Instrument Cluster Display

60
Reconfigurable Multifunctional 4. Speed Limit Warning Light Navigation instructions and call
Display Shows information regarding the Speed information can be repeated, besides on
Limiter function. the Information and Entertainment
1. Headlight Warning Lights System display, also in this area of the
Displays the headlight warning light for 5. Compass display, these functions can be set on the
either of the following active modes: Information and Entertainment System.
6. Reconfigurable Main Area
Headlights Home
Can display the following screens:
Automatic Headlights. The parameters shown on the display, for
Home
the modes: Dynamic, Natural and
2. Gear Selector Information Trip A Advanced Efficiency are:
Displays the following information Trip B (can be activated/deactivated Time
controlled by the gear selector function: through the Information and
Entertainment System) Outside Temperature
P = PARK
Performance Current Speed (shown if the repeat
R = REVERSE modes of the Phone and Navigation
N = NEUTRAL The screens can be selected, on rotation, functions are not active)
by pushing the MENU selection button on Range
D = DRIVE, (automatic forward speed)
the windshield wiper stalk.
AutoStick: + shifting to higher gear in
manual (sequential) driving mode;
shifting to lower gear in sequential
driving mode.

3. Forward Collision, Lane Departure,


Cruise Control
Displays operations for the following
modes:
Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
05036S0004NA
05036S0002EM
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) If Premium Instrument Cluster Display
MENU Selection/Reset Button
Equipped
Depending on the driving mode chosen
Cruise Control (CC) or Adaptive Cruise
using the Alfa DNA Pro (Dynamic,
Control (ACC) If Equipped
Natural, Advanced Efficiency and RACE),
the screens can be graphically different.
61
Trip A And B To reset the values, push and hold down
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

the button on the windshield wiper stalk.


The "Trip computer" can be used to
display, for all driving modes (Dynamic, Performance
Natural, Advanced Efficiency and RACE) The displayed parameters differ
and with the ignition device ON, the according to the active mode. The modes
measurements regarding the operating which can be selected using the Alfa
state of the vehicle. This function is DNA Pro system are:
characterized by two separate records,
called Trip A and Trip B (the latter can Natural
be deactivated by Information and
05036S0055NA Entertainment System), where the
Premium Instrument Cluster Display complete missions (journeys) are
In RACE mode, the consumption recorded in a reciprocally independent
indication index is not active and a sports manner.
gearshift indicator is displayed. The Trip A and Trip B are used to display
sports gearshift indicator is represented the values relating to:
by three yellow segments, if the third
indicator, characterized by the word Distance travelled
"SHIFT, is on, it means that the gear Average fuel consumption
should be shifted.
Average speed 05036S0009NA
Efficiency Consumption Graph
Active trip
The screen graphically reproduces some
Fuel consumption indicator parameters closely linked to the
efficiency of the driving style, with a view
to limiting consumption.
Advanced Efficiency

05036S0005NA
Race Mode

05036S0007NA
Premium Instrument Cluster Display
62
The displayed parameters are related to Displays the position by indicating the
vehicle stability, the graphs illustrate the cardinal direction.
trend of the longitudinal/lateral
accelerations (G-meter information), 8. Failure Warning Lights
considering gravity acceleration as a Area dedicated to displaying failures, the
reference unit. following symbols could be displayed on
rotation:
Lateral acceleration peaks are also
indicated. Low criticality symbols (yellow amber).
Race High criticality symbols (red).
05036S0011NA 9. Odometer
Dynamic Driving Style
Indicates the total miles travelled.
The three center icons on the screen
indicate the effectiveness of the driving PARAMETERS SET BY USER
style, linked to the following parameters:
acceleration, deceleration and gear
shifts, with a view to limiting
consumption. The bar below the icons
shows current consumption and the
green line represents the optimal area.
The globe lights up gradually according to 05036S0014NA
lower consumption. Acceleration Stability Gauge
Dynamic The displayed parameters are related to 05036S0015EM
vehicle stability, the graphs illustrate the Information and Entertainment System
trend of the longitudinal/lateral Multiple settings can be programmed by
accelerations (G-meter information), the user using the Information and
considering gravity acceleration as a Entertainment System. This section
reference unit. describes only the basic settings:
Lateral acceleration peaks are also Units & Language
indicated.
Time & Date
7. Vehicle Range
Cluster
Indicates the miles left before the fuel
tank is empty.
05036S0013NA
Acceleration Gauge
63
To access the settings list in the Units & Language Clock & Date
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Information and Entertainment System,


proceed as follows:
1. Press the MENU button to access the
main menu
2. Select Settings from the main menu
using the Rotary Knob

05036S0016EM 05036S0017EM
Units & Language Selectable Menu Clock & Date Menu Option
Options
The following settings can be modified
The following settings can be modified under the Clock & Date menu:
under the Units & Language menu:
Sync With GPS Time: activates or
Measure Units: select US, metric, or deactivates the clock synchronization
11036S0015EM
custom. The custom option allows for through the GPS. If the function is
individual selection of the unit measures deactivated, the options Set Time and
1 ON/OFF Control And Volume Knob Set Date are enabled.
Language: change the language of the
2 OPTION Button
system Set Time: set the time manually
3 Rotary Pad
4 MENU Button Restore Settings: restores the factory Time Format: set the time format to
settings either a 12-hour and a 24-hour clock
To access and change the setting, turn Set Date: set the date manually
and push the Rotary Pad.
Restore Settings: restores the factory
settings
To access and the change the setting,
turn and push the Rotary Pad.

64
Cluster WARNING LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES ON THE
INSTRUMENT PANEL
The following pages consist of warning
lights and messages.
Note:
The warning light turns on together
with a dedicated message and/or chime
when applicable. These indications are
precautionary and as such must not be
05036S0018EM considered as exhaustive and/or
Instrument Cluster Display Menu alternative to the information contained
Option in the Owners Manual, which you are
The following settings can be modified advised to read carefully in all cases.
under the Cluster menu: Always refer to the information in this
section in the event of a failure
Warning buzzer volume: set the indication.
volume of the warning buzzer
The failure indicators appearing on
Trip B: activate or deactivate the Trip the display are divided into two
function categories: very serious and less serious
Phone repeat: activate or deactivate faults. Serious faults are indicated by a
repeating the Phone function screens on repeated and prolonged warning "cycle.
the instrument cluster display Less serious faults are indicated by a
warning "cycle" with a shorter duration.
Restore Settings: restores the factory You can stop the warning cycle in both
settings cases by pushing the button located on
To access and the change the setting, the windshield wiper stalk. The
turn and push the Rotary Pad. instrument panel warning light will stay
on until the cause of the failure is
eliminated.

65
Red Warning Lights
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Warning Light What It Means What To Do


INSUFFICIENT BRAKE FLUID/ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE
ON
This light monitors various brake functions, including
brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the
brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake
is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is
a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir. For low brake fluid level, go to an authorized dealer to
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been have the system checked as soon as possible.
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the Release the electric park brake, then check that the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake warning light has turned off.
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the If the warning light stays on, contact an authorized dealer.
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has
been corrected. If the problem is related to the Brake
Booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake,
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
ELECTRONIC BRAKING FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBD)
FAILURE
The simultaneous turning on of the BRAKE (red) and
Drive very carefully to the nearest authorized dealer to
(amber) warning lights with the engine on indicates have the system inspected immediately.
either a failure of the EBD system or that the system is
not available. In this case, the rear wheels may suddenly
lock and the vehicle may swerve when braking abruptly.

66
Warning Light What It Means What To Do
AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb
check when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or
turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an
authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light will If the problem persists, contact an authorized dealer.
illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air
Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will stay on until
the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately.
SEAT BELT REMINDER WARNING LIGHT
When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN position,
if the drivers seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound
and the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or
Always wear your seat belt when operating the vehicle.
front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat
Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously
and a chime will sound. Refer to Occupant Restraints in
Safety for further information.

Stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as


OIL TEMPERATURE WARNING LIGHT
possible. If the problem persists, contact an authorized
This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high.
dealer.

Warning!

The fault of the warning light is signaled by the turning on of the icon on the instrument panel. In this case, the warning light may not indicate any
faults with the restraint systems. Before proceeding, contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked immediately.
If the warning light does not turn on when the ignition device is moved to ON or if it stays on when driving (together with the message on the
display), there might be a fault in the restraint systems; in this case, the air bags or pretensioners may not deploy in the event of an accident or, in a
lower number of cases, they could deploy erroneously. Before proceeding, contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked immediately.

67
Amber Warning Lights
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Warning
Light What It Means What To Do

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE (ABS) INDICATOR LIGHT


This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light
will turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the
Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and
service is required. However, the conventional brake system will Drive carefully and contact an authorized dealer as soon as
continue to operate normally if the brake indicator light is not possible.
on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as
soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If
the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized
dealer.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING INDICATOR LIGHT
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to
indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recommended
value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, Continue driving for up to 50 miles (80 km) at a speed no higher
optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be then 50 mph (80 km/h). Contact an authorized dealer to have
guaranteed. the tire repaired.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above,
the display will show the indications corresponding to each tire
in sequence.

68
Each tire, including the spare (if Please note that the TPMS is not a properly. Always check the TPMS
provided), should be checked monthly substitute for proper tire maintenance, malfunction telltale after replacing one
when cold and inflated to the inflation and it is the drivers responsibility to or more tires or wheels on your vehicle, to
pressure recommended by the vehicle maintain correct tire pressure, even if ensure that the replacement or alternate
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or under-inflation has not reached the level tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
tire inflation pressure label. (If your to trigger illumination of the TPMS low continue to function properly.
vehicle has tires of a different size than tire pressure telltale.
the size indicated on the vehicle placard Your vehicle has also been equipped with Caution!
or tire inflation pressure label, you should a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
determine the proper tire inflation when the system is not operating
pressure for those tires.) properly. The TPMS malfunction The TPMS has been optimized for the
As an added safety feature, your vehicle indicator is combined with the low tire original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS
has been equipped with a Tire Pressure pressure telltale. When the system pressures and warning have been
Monitoring System (TPMS) that detects a malfunction, the telltale will established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation
illuminates a low tire pressure telltale flash for approximately one minute and
or sensor damage may result when using
when one or more of your tires is then remain continuously illuminated. replacement equipment that is not of the
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, This sequence will continue upon same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket
when the low tire pressure telltale subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
illuminates, you should stop and check the malfunction exists. When the aftermarket tire sealants may cause the
your tires as soon as possible and inflate malfunction indicator is illuminated, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a system may not be able to detect or sensor to become inoperable. After using an
significantly under-inflated tire causes signal low tire pressure as intended. aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire TPMS malfunctions may occur for a that you take your vehicle to an authorized
dealership to have your sensor function
failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel variety of reasons, including the
checked.
efficiency and tire tread life, and may installation of replacement or alternate
affect the vehicles handling and stopping tires or wheels on the vehicle that
ability. prevent the TPMS from functioning

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

Tire Pressure Low In any situation in which the message on the display is "See
The indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the tire Manual", it is ESSENTIAL to refer to Auxiliary Driving
pressure is lower than the recommended value and/or that Systems in Safety, strictly complying with the
slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal tire indications that you find there.
duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.

69
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Warning Light What It Means What To Do


ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL (ESC) INDICATOR
LIGHT
When the ignition is cycled to ON, the indicator light
illuminates, but should turn off as soon as the engine is
started.
ESC System Intervention: Intervention by the system is
indicated by the flashing of the indicator light: it indicates
that the vehicle is in critical stability and grip conditions.
ESC System Failure: If the indicator light does not turn off,
or if it stays on with the engine running, a failure was found
in the ESC system. In these cases, contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Hill Start Assist System Failure: The illumination of the
indicator light indicates a Hill Start Assist system failure.
ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL (ESC) OFF
INDICATOR LIGHT
When the ignition is cycled to ON, the indicator light
illuminates, but should turn off as soon as the engine is
started.
The indicator light illuminates to indicate that some active
safety systems have been partially or totally deactivated.
For further details about the active safety systems, refer
to Active Safety Systems in Safety. When the active
safety systems are reactivated, the indicator light turns
off.

REAR FOG LIGHT


The indicator illuminates when the rear fog light is
activated.

70
Warning Light What It Means What To Do
ENGINE CHECK/MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT (MIL)
In normal conditions, when the ignition is cycled to ON, the Under these conditions, the vehicle can continue travelling
indicator light illuminates, but it should turn off as soon as at moderate speed but without demanding excessive
the engine is started. effort from the engine or high speed. Prolonged use of the
The operation of the indicator light may be checked by the vehicle with the indicator light on constantly may cause
traffic police using specific devices. Comply with the laws damage. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
and regulations of the country where you are driving.

Caution!

If, turning the ignition device to ON, the warning light does not turn on or if it turns on steadily or flashing when travelling (on some versions
together with the message on the display), contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

FORWARD COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM (FCW)


Drive carefully and contact an authorized dealer as soon
This indicator light informs the driver that the frontal
as possible.
collision alarm function is not enabled.

FUEL RESERVE / LIMITED RANGE


The indicator light (or the symbol in the display)
Refuel the vehicle.
illuminates when about 2.4 gallons (9 liters) of fuel is left
in the tank.

Warning!

If the warning light (or the icon on the display) flashes while driving, contact an authorized dealer.

71
Green Telltale Indicator Lights
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Indicator light What It Means What To Do


PARK/HEADLIGHT ON INDICATOR LIGHT
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or
headlights are turned on.
Headlight Off Delay
This function allows the headlights to remain on for 30,
60 or 90 seconds after the ignition was placed in the
STOP position.
LEFT TURN SIGNAL
The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash
independently for the left turn signal as selected, as well
as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as
selected when the multifunction lever is moved down
(left). This directional arrow will flash in conjunction with
the right directional arrow when the hazard warning light
button is pushed.
RIGHT TURN SIGNAL
The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash
independently for the right turn signal as selected, as well
as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as
selected when the multifunction lever is moved up (right).
This directional arrow will flash in conjunction with the left
directional arrow when the hazard warning light button is
pushed.

AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS IF EQUIPPED


This indicator light will illuminate when the automatic high
beam headlights are activated.

72
Blue Telltale Indicator Light

Indicator Light What It Means What To Do


HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on.
Push the multifunction control lever away from you to
switch the headlights to high beam. Push the lever a
second time to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on,
flash to pass scenario.

Red Symbols

Symbol What It Means What To Do


LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE
This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure. If the
telltale turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut
off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound
when this telltale turns on. Do not operate the vehicle
until the cause is corrected. This telltale does not indicate
how much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be
checked under the hood.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Note:
Do not use the vehicle until the failure has been solved.
The illumination of the telltale does not indicate the
amount of oil in the engine: the oil level can be checked on
the display upon entering the vehicle and also by
activating the "Oil level" function on the Information and
Entertainment System. The oil level can also be checked
manually.

73
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Caution!

If the LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE symbol switches on when driving, stop the engine immediately and contact an authorized dealer.

Symbol What It Means What To Do


In normal driving conditions: stop the vehicle, turn off the
engine and check that the coolant level in the reservoir is
not below the MIN mark. In this case, wait for the engine
to cool down, then slowly and carefully open the cap, top
ENGINE TEMPERATURE WARNING LIGHT up with coolant and check that the level is between the
This telltale warns of an overheated engine condition. If MIN and MAX marks on the reservoir itself. Also check
the engine coolant temperature is too high, this indicator visually for any fluid leaks. Contact an authorized dealer if
will illuminate and a single chime will sound. If the the telltale comes on when the engine is started again.
temperature reaches the upper limit, a continuous chime If the vehicle is used under demanding conditions (e.g. in
will be sound for 4 minutes or until the engine is allowed high-performance driving): slow down and, if the telltale
to cool whichever comes first. stays on, stop the vehicle. Stop for two or three minutes
with the engine running and slightly accelerated to
facilitate better coolant circulation, then turn the engine
off. Check that the coolant level is correct as described
above.
POWER STEERING FAILURE
If the telltale remains on, you could not have steering
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
assistance and the effort required to operate the steering
wheel could be increased; steering is, however, possible.
DOOR OPEN INDICATOR LIGHT
The telltale illuminates when one or more doors are not
Close the doors properly.
completely shut. An acoustic signal is activated with the
doors open and the vehicle moving.

74
Symbol What It Means What To Do
HOOD OPEN INDICATOR LIGHT
The telltale turns on when the hood is not properly closed,
along with the icon, an image of the vehicle with an open
Close the hood properly.
hood appears on the display.
A buzzer is heard when the hood is open and the vehicle is
moving.
TRUNK LID OPEN INDICATOR LIGHT
The telltale turns on when the trunk lid is not properly
closed, along with the icon, an image of the vehicle with an
Close the trunk lid properly.
open trunk lid appears on the display.
A buzzer is heard when the trunk lid is open and the
vehicle is moving.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FAILURE


The telltale illuminates, together with a buzzer warning, to Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
indicate that the automatic transmission is faulty.

Caution!

Driving the vehicle with this symbol on may severely damage the gearbox, with resulting breakage. The oil may also overheat: contact with hot
engine or with exhaust components at high temperature could cause fires.

Symbol What It Means What To Do


ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL (ETC) WARNING
LIGHTS
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This telltale, along with the related message, signals a
failure in the electronic throttle control system (ETC).

75
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Symbol What It Means What To Do


Place the ignition in the off position and the shift selector
in the park position: the telltale should turn off. If the
If a failure is detected, the telltale illuminates while the telltale stays on with engine running the vehicle can still
engine is running. be driven.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have
the failure eliminated.
If the telltale flashes with the engine running, immediate
intervention is required. A loss of performance, Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have
irregular/high idling speed or engine stopping might take the failure eliminated.
place and the vehicle may need to be towed.
LOW ENGINE OIL LEVEL
This telltale appears on the panel when the engine oil level
falls below the minimum recommended value.
Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked.
The level must also be checked using the dipstick in the
engine compartment (see chapter "Servicing and
Maintenance.")

ALFA STEERING TORQUE (AST) FAILURE


The illumination of the telltale signals a failure in the Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked.
automatic steering correction system.

ALTERNATOR FAILURE
The illumination of the telltale with engine on Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
corresponds to an alternator failure.

76
Amber Symbols

Symbol What It Means What To Do

ENGINE IMMOBILIZER FAILURE / BREAK-IN ATTEMPT


Engine Immobilizer System Failure Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
The telltale will illuminate to report a failure of the Engine
Immobilizer system.

Break-In Attempt
The telltale will illuminate when the ignition is cycled to
ON position, to indicate a possible break-in attempt
detected by the alarm system.
Electronic Key Not Recognized
The telltale will illuminate when the engine is started and
the electronic key is not recognized by the system.
Alarm System Failure
The telltale will illuminate to report an alarm system
failure.

For reactivating the fuel cut-off system, refer to


FUEL CUT-OFF INDICATOR LIGHT Enhanced Accident Response System in Occupant
The telltale will illuminate after an accident has occurred Restraint Systems" in "Safety for further information. If it
and the system has shut the fuel off. is not possible to restore the fuel supply, contact an
authorized dealer.

PARK SENSORS SYSTEM FAILURE


The telltale will illuminate when the system has failed or is Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked.
not available.

POSSIBLE ICE ON ROAD


The telltale will illuminate when the outside temperature
falls to or below 37F (3C).

77
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Symbol What It Means What To Do


ENGINE OIL CHANGE REQUIRED IF EQUIPPED
The telltale is illuminated only for a limited time.
Note:
After the first indication, each time the engine is started
the symbol will continue to illuminate as described above
until the oil is changed. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
If the telltale flashes, this does not mean that there is a
fault on the vehicle, rather it simply reports that it is now
necessary to change the oil as a result of regular use of
the vehicle. The deterioration of engine oil is accelerated
by using the vehicle for short drives, preventing the
engine from reaching operating temperature.

Caution!

Deteriorated engine oil should be replaced as soon as possible after the symbol is switched on, and never more than 500 miles (805 km) after it
first switches on. Failure to observe the above may result in severe damage to the engine and invalidate the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. When
this symbol comes on, it does not mean that the level of engine oil is low, so if it flashes you do not need to top up the engine oil.

Symbol What It Means What To Do

ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR FAILURE


The telltale will illuminate in the event of engine oil Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
pressure sensor failure.

ENGINE OIL LEVEL SENSOR FAILURE


The telltale will illuminate in the event of engine oil level Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
sensor failure.

78
Symbol What It Means What To Do
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) SYSTEM
FAILURE
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
The telltale will illuminate in the case of failure of the
Forward Collision Warning system.

START/STOP SYSTEM FAILURE


Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have
This telltale will illuminate to report a Stop/Start system
the failure eliminated.
failure.

RAIN SENSOR FAILURE


The telltale will illuminate in the case of failure of the Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
automatic windshield wiper.

DUSK SENSOR FAILURE


The telltale will illuminate in the case of failure of the Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
automatic low beam alignment.

BLIND SPOT MONITORING SYSTEM FAILURE


The telltale will illuminate in the event of a Blind Spot Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Monitoring system failure.

FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FAILURE


The telltale will illuminate in the event of fuel level sensor Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
failure.

EXTERIOR LIGHTS FAILURE


The telltale will illuminate to indicate a failure on the The failure may be caused by a blown bulb, a blown
following lights: daytime running lights (DRLs) / parking protection fuse, or an interruption of the electrical
lights / trailer turn signal indicators (if present) / trailer connection.
lights (if present) / side lights / turn signal indicators / Replace the bulb or the relevant fuse. Contact an
rear fog light / reversing light / brake lights / license plate authorized dealer.
lights.

79
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Symbol What It Means What To Do

KEYLESS SYSTEM FAILURE


The telltale will illuminate in the event of keyless system Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
failure.

FUEL CUT-OFF SYSTEM FAILURE


The telltale will illuminate in the event of fuel cut-off Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
system failure.

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW) SYSTEM FAILURE


The telltale will illuminate in the event of a fault in the Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Lane Departure Warning system.

AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS FAILURE IF


EQUIPPED Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have
The telltale will illuminate to report a failure of the the failure eliminated.
automatic high beam headlights.

80
Symbol What It Means What To Do
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID OVERHEATING
The telltale will illuminate in the case of transmission Wait for the telltale to turn off with the engine off or
overheating, after a particularly demanding use. In this idling.
case an engine performance limitation is carried out.

AUDIO SYSTEM FAILURE


Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have
The telltale will illuminate to report a failure of the audio
the failure eliminated.
system.

SPEED LIMITER SYSTEM FAILURE


Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have
While driving, the telltale will illuminate to signal a Speed
the failure eliminated.
Limiter system failure.

LOOSE FUEL FILLER CAP


Lights up if the fuel tank cap is open or not properly Tighten the cap properly.
closed.

ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE FAILURE


The telltale will illuminate and a message will display to
signal a failure in the electric park brake system.
If you are still able to drive the vehicle (park brake is not
This failure may partially or completely block the vehicle
engaged), drive to the nearest authorized dealer and
because the park brake could remain activated even if
remember, when executing any maneuvers/commands,
automatically or manually disengaged using the relevant
that the electric park brake is not operational.
controls. In these circumstances, you can disengage the
park brake following the emergency disengagement
procedure described in In Case Of Emergency.

Warning!

If a failure is present with sharp braking, the rear wheels may lock and the vehicle may swerve.

81
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Symbol What It Means What To Do

LOW COOLANT LEVEL IF EQUIPPED


This telltale will illuminate to indicate that the vehicle Top up, as described in "Servicing And Maintenance.
coolant level is low.

SERVICE ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM


This light will illuminate when the Adaptive Cruise Control Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked.
(ACC) is not operating and needs service.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.


WEAR ON BRAKE PADS Note:
This light will illuminate when the brake pads have Always use genuine parts or similar because the
reached their wear limit. Integrated Brake System (IBS) system could detect
anomalies.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
WEAR ON CCB BRAKE DISCS IF EQUIPPED Warning!
This light will illuminate when the carbon ceramic brake It is recommended to use only OEM brake pads in order
discs have reached their wear limit. to ensure the original performance of the braking
system.

Symbol What It Means What To Do

DYNAMIC DRIVE CONTROL SYSTEM FAILURE


The telltale will illuminate to signal a failure in the
dynamic drive control system.

WINDSHIELD WIPER FAILURE


Contact an authorized dealer.
Signals a windshield wiper failure.

82
Symbol What It Means What To Do

GENERIC INDICATION
Signals information and failures.
The accompanying messages describe the failure.

FOUR WHEEL DRIVE FAILURE


Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have
This telltale will illuminate to report a four wheel drive
the failure eliminated.
system failure.

AFS SYSTEM FAILURE


The telltale will illuminate to indicate the automatic Go to an authorized dealer to have the system checked.
directional light system failure.

SOFT SUSPENSION CALIBRATION INSERTION IF


EQUIPPED
The telltale will illuminate when the most comfortable
suspension setting is activated.

SHOCK ABSORBERS FAILURE (ADC) IF EQUIPPED


While driving, if the telltale illuminates, it signals a failure Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked.
in the suspension system.

To refill the liquid, refer to Engine Compartment in


WINDSHIELD WASHER LIQUID LEVEL
Servicing And Maintenance. Always use liquid with the
The telltale will illuminate to indicate that the level of the
features indicated in the Fluids And Lubricants section
windshield and headlight washing fluid (if any) is low.
in Technical Specifications.

83
Green Symbols
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Symbol What It Means

HEADLIGHTS
The telltale will illuminate when the headlights are turned on.

AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS
The symbol lights up when the automatic headlights are on.

START/STOP OPERATION
The telltale will illuminate in the case of Start/Stop system intervention (stopping the engine).
When the engine is restarted, the telltale will shut off (for the engine restarting modes refer to Stop/Start in Starting And
Operating).

SPEED CONTROL ACTIVATED


The telltale will illuminate when the Speed Control system is activated.

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED


The symbol comes on when the Adaptive Cruise Control system is activated.

Blue Symbols

Symbol What it means

AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS IF EQUIPPED


The telltale will illuminate when the automatic high beam headlights are activated.

HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS


The telltale will illuminate when the high beam headlights are activated.

84
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
SYSTEM Cybersecurity MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
Operation Your vehicle is required to have an In some localities, it may be a legal
The OBD (Onboard Diagnostic system) Onboard Diagnostic system (OBD II) and requirement to pass an inspection of your
carries out a continuous diagnosis of the a connection port to allow access to vehicle's emissions control system.
components of the vehicle related to information related to the performance Failure to pass could prevent vehicle
emissions. of your emissions controls. Authorized registration.
service technicians may need to access For states that require
It also alerts the driver of when these this information to assist with the
components are no longer in peak an Inspection and
diagnosis and service of your vehicle and Maintenance (I/M), this
condition by switching on the warning emissions system.
light on the instrument panel (see check verifies the
Warning Lights And Messages Malfunction Indicator
paragraph in this chapter). Warning! Light (MIL) is
The aim of the OBD system (Onboard functioning and is not
Diagnostic) is to: on when the engine is running, and that
ONLY an authorized service technician the OBD II system is ready for testing.
Monitor the efficiency of the system should connect equipment to the OBD II
connection port in order to diagnose or Normally, the OBD II system will be ready.
Indicate an increase in emissions The OBD II system may not be ready if
service your vehicle.
Indicate the need to replace damaged your vehicle was recently serviced,
If unauthorized equipment is connected to recently had a dead battery or a battery
components
the OBD II connection port, such as a
replacement. If the OBD II system should
The vehicle also has a connector, which driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
be determined not ready for the I/M test,
can interface with appropriate tools, that Be possible that vehicle systems, your vehicle may fail the test.
makes it possible to read the error codes including safety related systems, could be
stored in the electronic control units Your vehicle has a simple ignition
impaired or a loss of vehicle control could
together with a series of specific occur that may result in an accident actuated test, which you can use prior to
parameters for engine operation and involving serious injury or death. going to the test station. To check if your
diagnosis. This check can be carried out vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you
Access, or allow others to access, must do the following:
by your authorized dealer. information stored in your vehicle systems,
Note: After eliminating a fault, to check including personal information. 1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON
the system completely, your authorized position, but do not crank or start the
dealer is obliged to run tests and, if engine.
necessary certain road tests.
Note: If you crank or start the engine,
you will have to start this test over.

85
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition If your OBD II system is not ready, you
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

switch to the ON position, you will see the should see an authorized dealer or repair
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) facility. If your vehicle was recently
symbol come on as part of a normal bulb serviced or had a battery failure or
check. replacement, you may need to do nothing
more than drive your vehicle as you
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one normally would in order for your OBD II
of two things will happen: system to update. A recheck with the
The MIL will flash for about ten above test routine may then indicate that
seconds and then return to being fully the system is now ready.
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition Regardless of whether your vehicle's
or start the engine. This means that your OBD II system is ready or not, if the MIL is
vehicle's OBD II system is not ready and illuminated during normal vehicle
you should not proceed to the I/M operation you should have your vehicle
station. serviced before going to the I/M station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will The I/M station can fail your vehicle
remain fully illuminated until you place because the MIL is on with the engine
the ignition in the off position or start the running.
engine. This means that your vehicle's
OBD II system is ready and you can
proceed to the I/M station.

86
SAFETY

This very important section describes ACTIVE SAFETY SYSTEMS . . . . . . .88


the safety systems that your vehicle is AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS . . . .91
equipped with, and provides instructions OCCUPANT RESTRAINT
on how to use them correctly. SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125

87
ACTIVE SAFETY SYSTEMS The system also improves control and
SAFETY

The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws


The vehicle may be equipped with the stability of the vehicle when braking on a of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
following active safety devices: surface where the grip of the left and can it increase braking or steering efficiency
right wheels varies, such as in a corner. beyond that afforded by the condition of the
Anti-Lock Braking (ABS) System vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
The Electronic Braking Force Distribution
Drive Train Control (DTC) System (EBD) system works with the ABS, afforded.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) allowing the brake force to be distributed The ABS cannot prevent collisions,
System between the front and rear wheels. including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle too
Traction Control System (TCS) System Intervention closely, or hydroplaning.
Panic Brake Assist (PBA) System The ABS equipped on this vehicle is The capabilities of an ABS equipped
Hill Start Assist (HSA) System provided with the "Brake-by-wire" vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless
(Integrated Brake System - IBS) function. or dangerous manner that could jeopardize
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
With this system, the command given by the users safety or the safety of others.
System pressing the brake pedal is not
Active Torque Vectoring (ATV) System transmitted hydraulically, but electrically.
Therefore, the light pulsation that is felt Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
For the operation of the systems, see the System
following pages. on the pedal with the traditional system
is no longer noticeable. The ESC system improves the directional
Anti-Lock Braking (ABS) System control and stability of the vehicle in
An integral part of the braking system, various driving conditions.
the ABS prevents one or more wheels Warning! The ESC system corrects the vehicles
from locking and slipping in all road understeer and oversteer, distributing
surface conditions, regardless of the the brake force on the appropriate
The ABS contains sophisticated wheels. The torque supplied by the
intensity of the braking action. The
electronic equipment that may be
system ensures that the vehicle can be engine can also be reduced in order to
susceptible to interference caused by
controlled even during emergency improperly installed or high output radio maintain control of the vehicle.
braking, allowing the driver to optimize transmitting equipment. This interference The ESC system uses sensors installed
stopping distances. can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking on the vehicle to determine the path that
The system intervenes during braking capability. Installation of such equipment the driver intends to follow and
when the wheels are about to lock, should be performed by qualified compares it with the vehicles effective
professionals. path. When the real path deviates from
typically in emergency braking or
low-grip conditions where locking may be Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will the desired path, the ESC system
more frequent. diminish their effectiveness and may lead to intervenes to counter the vehicles
a collision. Pumping makes the stopping understeer or oversteer.
distance longer. Just press firmly on your
brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
88
Oversteer occurs when the vehicle is Vehicle modifications, or failure to System Intervention
turning more than it should according to properly maintain your vehicle, may change The intervention of the system is
the angle of the steering wheel. the handling characteristics of your vehicle, indicated by the flashing of the ESC
and may negatively affect the performance warning light on the instrument panel, to
Understeer occurs when the vehicle is of the ESC system. Changes to the steering
turning less than it should according to inform the driver that the vehicle
system, suspension, braking system, tire stability and grip are critical.
the angle of the steering wheel. type and size or wheel size may adversely
affect ESC performance. Improperly Panic Brake Assist (PBA) System
System Intervention inflated and unevenly worn tires may also The PBA system is designed to improve
The intervention of the system is degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle
modification or poor vehicle maintenance
the vehicles braking capacity during
indicated by the flashing of the ESC emergency braking.
that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC
warning light on the instrument panel, to system can increase the risk of loss of The system detects emergency braking
inform the driver that the vehicle vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal by monitoring the speed and force with
stability and grip are critical. injury and death. which the brake pedal is pressed, and
consequently applies the optimal brake
Traction Control System (TCS) pressure. This can reduce the braking
Warning! distance: the PBA system therefore
The system automatically operates in the
complements the ABS.
event of slipping, loss of grip on wet
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot roads (hydroplaning), and acceleration on Maximum assistance from the PBA
prevent the natural laws of physics from one or both drive wheels on roads that system is obtained by pressing the brake
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the are slippery, snowy, icy, etc. Depending pedal very quickly. In addition, the brake
traction afforded by prevailing road pedal should be pressed continuously
on the slipping conditions, two different
conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, during braking, avoiding intermittent
including those resulting from excessive control systems are activated:
presses, to get the most out of the
speed in turns, driving on very slippery If the slipping involves both drive
system. Do not reduce pressure on the
surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot wheels, the system intervenes, reducing
prevent accidents resulting from loss of brake pedal until braking is no longer
the power transmitted by the engine. necessary.
vehicle control due to inappropriate driver
input for the conditions. Only a safe, If the slipping only involves one of the The PBA system is deactivated when the
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent drive wheels, the Brake Limited brake pedal is released.
accidents. The capabilities of an ESC Differential (BLD) function is activated,
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in
automatically braking the wheel which is
a reckless or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the users safety or the safety of slipping (the behavior of a self-locking
others. differential is simulated). This will
increase the engine torque transferred to
the wheel which isn't slipping.

89
allowing your right foot to be moved system controls the steering through the
SAFETY

easily from the brake pedal to the DST function to implement an additional
Warning!
accelerator. torque contribution on the steering wheel
The system will automatically deactivate in order to suggest the most correct
The Panic Brake Assist (PBA) cannot prevent after two seconds without starting, maneuver to the driver.
the natural laws of physics from acting on gradually releasing the braking pressure. The coordinated action of the brakes and
the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction During this release stage, it is possible to steering increases the sensation of
afforded by prevailing road conditions. PBA hear a typical mechanical brake release safety and control of the vehicle.
cannot prevent collisions, including those
noise, indicating the imminent movement Note: The DST feature is only meant to
resulting from excessive speed in turns,
driving on very slippery surfaces, or of the vehicle. help the driver realize the correct course
hydroplaning. The capabilities of a of action through small torques on the
PBA-equipped vehicle must never be steering wheel, which means the
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, Warning! effectiveness of the DST feature is highly
which could jeopardize the user's safety or dependent on the drivers sensitivity and
the safety of others. overall reaction to the applied torque. It
There may be situations where the Hill Start
is very important to realize that this
Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight
Hill Start Assist (HSA) System rolling may occur, such as on minor hills or feature will not steer the vehicle,
This is an integral part of the ESC system with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a meaning the driver is still responsible for
and facilitates starting on slopes, trailer. HSA is not a substitute for active steering the vehicle.
activating automatically in the following driving involvement. It is always the drivers
Active Torque Vectoring (ATV) System
cases: responsibility to be attentive to distance to
other vehicles, people, and objects, and most The dynamic drive control is used to
Uphill: vehicle stationary on a road importantly brake operation to ensure safe optimize and balance the drive torque
with a gradient higher than 5%, engine operation of the vehicle under all road between the wheels of the same axles.
running, brake pressed and transmission conditions. Your complete attention is The ATV system improves the grip in
in NEUTRAL (N) or gear other than always required while driving to maintain turns, sending more drive torque to the
safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow external wheel.
REVERSE (R) engaged. these warnings can result in a collision or
Downhill: vehicle stationary on a road serious personal injury. Given that, in a turn, the external wheels
with a gradient higher than 5%, engine of the car travel more than the internal
ones and therefore turn faster, sending a
running, brake pressed and reverse gear Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) System higher thrust to the external rear wheel
engaged. The DST function uses the integration of allows for the car to be more stable and
When setting off, the ESC system control the ESC system with the electric power to not suffer an "understeer" condition.
unit maintains the braking pressure on steering to increase the safety level of Understeer occurs when the vehicle is
the wheels until the engine torque the whole vehicle. turning less than appropriate for the
necessary for starting is reached, or in In critical situations (braking on surfaces steering wheel position.
any case for a maximum of two seconds, with different grip conditions), the ESC
90
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS While driving, the system monitors the
The following auxiliary driving systems detection area from three different
are standard in this vehicle: points (side, rear and front) to check
whether an alert needs to be sent to the
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) driver. The system can detect the
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) presence of a vehicle in one of these
three areas.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) Note:

Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) System The system does not alert the driver
for the presence of fixed object (e.g.
06016S0002EM
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system safety barriers, poles, walls, etc.).
BSM Indicator Light
uses two radar sensors, located in the However, in some circumstances, the
rear bumper (one for each side), to detect When the engine is started the warning system may activate in the presence of
the presence of other vehicles in the rear light turns on to signal the driver that the these objects. This is normal and does
side blind spots of your vehicle. system is active. not indicate a system malfunction.
Sensors The system does not alert the driver
The sensors are activated when any about the presence of vehicles coming
forward gear is engaged at a speed from the opposite direction, in the
higher than 6 mph (10 km/h) or when adjacent lanes.
REVERSE is engaged.
The sensors are temporarily deactivated
when the vehicle is in PARK. Warning!
The detection area of the system covers
approximately one lane on both sides of The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an
the vehicle. aid to help detect objects in the blind spot
06016S0001EM
Rear Sensor Location This area begins from the door mirror and zones. The BSM system is not designed to
extends for 19 ft (6 m) towards the rear detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals.
The system warns the driver about the part of the vehicle. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the
presence of other vehicles in the BSM system, always check your vehicles
When the sensors are active, the system mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use
detection area by illuminating the monitors the detection areas on both
warning light located within the door your turn signal before changing lanes.
sides of the vehicle and warns the driver Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
mirror on the side in which the other about the possible presence of vehicles death.
vehicle was detected. in these areas.

91
Rear View Note: Operating Mode
SAFETY

The system detects vehicles coming from If the sensors are covered by objects The system may be activated/
the rear part of your vehicle on both sides or vehicles, the system will not warn the deactivated via the Information and
and entering the rear detection area with driver. Entertainment System. To access the
a difference in speed of less than 31 mph function, select the following items on
(50 km/h) with relation to your vehicle. For the system to operate correctly, the main menu in sequence:
the rear bumper area where the radar
Overtaking Vehicles sensors are located must stay free from 1. Settings.
If another vehicle is overtaken slowly, snow, ice and dirt gathered from the 2. Safety.
with a difference in speed of less than road surface.
15 mph (25 km/h) and the vehicle stays in 3. Blind Spot Alert.
the blind spot for approximately Do not cover the rear bumper area
1.5 seconds, the warning light on the door where the radar sensors are located with "Blind Spot Alert Visual Mode
mirror of the corresponding side any object (e.g. adhesives, bike rack, When the system is enabled, the warning
illuminates. etc.). light within the door mirror on the side of
If the difference in speed between the the detected object illuminates.
two vehicles is greater than 15 mph Warning! The visual warning on the mirror will blink
(25 km/h), the warning light will not if the driver activates the turn signals,
illuminate. indicating a lane change.
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) The warning will be fixed if the driver
back up aid system. It is intended to be used
System to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in stays in the same lane.
This system helps the driver during a parking lot situation. Drivers must be "Blind Spot Alert" Function
reverse maneuvers in the case of reduced careful when backing up, even when using Deactivation
RCP. Always check carefully behind your
visibility. When the system is deactivated ("Blind
vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check
The RCP system monitors the rear for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, Spot Alert" mode off), the BSM or RCP
detection areas on both sides of the obstructions, and blind spots before backing systems will not emit an acoustic or a
vehicle to detect objects moving towards up. Failure to do so can result in serious visual warning.
the sides of the vehicle, with a minimum injury or death. The BSM system will store the operating
speed between 1 mph (1 km/h) and mode running when the engine was
2 mph (3 km/h) and objects moving at a stopped. Each time the engine is started,
maximum speed of 21 mph (35 km/h), in the operating mode stored previously will
areas such as parking lots. be recalled and used.
The system activation is signaled to the
driver by an acoustic warning.

92
General Information detected (limited braking). Signals and
limited braking are intended to allow the
The following regulatory statement driver time to intervene.
applies to all Radio Frequency (RF)
In situations with the risk of collision, if
devices equipped in this vehicle:
the system detects no intervention by
This device complies with Part 15 of the the driver, it provides automatic braking
FCC Rules and with Industry Canada to help slow the vehicle and mitigate the
license-exempt RSS standard(s). potential front end collision (automatic
Operation is subject to the following two braking). If intervention by the driver on
conditions: the brake pedal is detected, but not
1. This device may not cause harmful 06016S0003EM deemed sufficient, the system may
interference. Front Bumper Radar Location intervene in order to improve the
reaction of the braking system by
2. This device must accept any reducing vehicle speed further
interference received, including (additional assistance in braking stage).
interference that may cause undesired The system will intervene automatically
operation. in case of imminent collision or impact
Note: Changes or modifications not against a pedestrian crossing the road
expressly approved by the party (speed under 31 mph (50 km/h)).
responsible for compliance could void the Note: For safety reasons, when the
users authority to operate the vehicle has stopped, the brake calipers
equipment. may remain blocked for about two
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) seconds. Make sure to press the brake
System pedal if the vehicle moves slightly
06016S0004EM forward.
This is a driving assistance system which Windshield Camera Location
uses a radar located behind the front
bumper and a camera located in the In the event of an imminent collision, the
system intervenes by automatically Warning!
central part of the windshield.
braking the vehicle to prevent the
collision or reduce its effects. Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not
The system provides the driver with intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor
audible and visual signals through can FCW detect every type of potential
dedicated messages on the instrument collision. The driver has the responsibility to
cluster display. avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via
braking and steering. Failure to follow this
The system may lightly brake to warn the warning could lead to serious injury or death.
driver if a potential front end collision is
93
Engagement/Disengagement Activation/Deactivation The default setting is "Med". With this
SAFETY

The following functions can be selected The Forward Collision Warning system is setting, the system warns the driver of a
in sequence using the Information and activated whenever the engine is started possible collision with the vehicle in front
Entertainment System: regardless of what is shown on the when that vehicle is at a standard
Information and Entertainment System. distance, between that of the other two
1. Settings. settings.
Following a deactivation, the system will
2. Safety. not warn the driver about the possible With the system sensitivity set to "Far",
collision with the preceding vehicle, the system will warn the driver of a
3. Forward Collision Warning. regardless of the setting selected with possible collision with the vehicle in front
4. Mode. the Information and Entertainment when that vehicle is at a greater distance,
System. thus providing the possibility of acting on
Select from among three operating the brakes more lightly and gradually.
modes: Note: Each time the engine is started,
the system is activated regardless of This setting provides the drivers with the
Warning And Brake: the system (if what setting was selected when the maximum possible reaction time to
active), in addition to the visual and engine was turned OFF. prevent a potential collision.
audible warnings, provides limited The system is active: With the option set to "Near", the system
braking, automatic braking, and will alert the driver of a possible collision
additional assistance in braking stage Each time the engine is started. with the vehicle in front when that vehicle
where the driver does not brake In the Information and Entertainment is close. This setting offers the driver a
sufficiently in the event of a potential System. lower reaction time compared to the
front end collision. "Med" and "Far" settings, in the event of a
When the ignition is in the ON position. potential collision, but permits more
Only Warning: the system (if active), dynamic driving of the vehicle.
does not provide limited braking, but The vehicle speed is between 4 mph
guarantees automatic braking or (7 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h). The system sensitivity setting is kept in
additional assistance in braking stage the memory when the engine is turned
When the front seat belts are OFF.
where the driver does not brake at all or fastened.
not sufficiently enough in the event of a System Limited Operation Signal
potential front end collision. Changing The System Sensitivity If a dedicated message is displayed, a
The sensitivity of the system can be condition limiting the system operation
Disabled: the system does not provide changed through the Information and may have occurred. The possible reasons
visual and audible warnings, limited Entertainment System menu, choosing of this limitation are if something is
braking, automatic braking, or additional from one of the following three options: blocking the camera view, or a fault is
assistance in braking stage. The system "Near", "Med" or "Far". Refer to the present.
will therefore provide no indication of a description in the Information and
possible collision. If an obstruction is signaled, clean the
Entertainment System Supplement for area of the windshield.
how to change the settings.
94
Although the vehicle can still be driven in In certain cases, this dedicated message Driving In Special Conditions
normal conditions, the system may be not could be displayed when the radar is not In certain driving conditions, system
completely available. detecting any vehicles or objects within intervention might be unexpected or
When the conditions limiting the system its view range. delayed. The driver must therefore be very
functions end, this will go back to normal If atmospheric conditions are not the careful, keeping control of the vehicle.
and complete operation. Should the fault reason behind this message, check if the
Driving close to a bend.
persist, contact your authorized dealer. sensor is dirty. It could be necessary to
System Failure Signaling clean or remove any obstructions in the The vehicle ahead is leaving a
If the system turns off and a dedicated area. roundabout.
message is shown on the display, it If the message appears frequently, even Vehicles with small dimensions and/or
means that there is a fault with the in the absence of atmospheric conditions not aligned in the driving lane.
system. such as snow, rain, mud or other
obstructions, contact your authorized Lane change by other vehicles.
In this case, it is still possible to drive the
vehicle, but you are advised to contact an dealer for a sensor alignment check. Vehicles traveling at right angles to the
authorized dealer as soon as possible. In the absence of visible obstructions, vehicle.
Radar Indication Not Available manually removing the decorative cover
Note: In particularly complex traffic
trim and cleaning the radar surface could
If conditions are such that the radar conditions, the driver can deactivate the
be required. Have this operation
cannot detect obstacles correctly, the system manually through the Information
performed at your authorized dealer.
system is deactivated and a dedicated and Entertainment System.
message appears on the display. This Note: It is recommended that you do not
generally occurs in the event of poor install devices, accessories, or
visibility, such as when it is snowing or aerodynamic attachments in front of the
raining heavily. sensor or darken it in any way, as this can
compromise the correct functioning of
The function of this system can also be the system.
temporarily reduced due to obstructions
such as mud, dirt or ice on the bumper. In Frontal Collision Alarm With Active
such cases, a dedicated message will be Braking
shown on the display and the system will If this function is selected, the brakes are
be deactivated. This message can operated to reduce the speed of the
sometimes appear in conditions of high vehicle in the event of potential collision.
reflectivity (e.g. tunnels with reflective This function applies an additional
tiles or ice or snow). When the conditions braking pressure if the braking pressure
limiting the system functions end, it will applied by the driver does not suffice to
go back to normal and complete prevent potential collision.
operation. The function is active with speed above
4 mph (7 km/h).
95
Driving Close To A Bend Vehicles With Small Dimensions
SAFETY

When entering or leaving a wide bend, the And/Or Not Aligned In The Driving Lane
system may detect a vehicle in front you, The system cannot detect vehicles in
but not in the same driving lane. In cases front of you but outside the range of the
such as these, the system may intervene. radar sensor and may therefore not react
in the presence of small vehicles, such as
bicycles or motorcycles.

06016S0007EM
Other Vehicles Changing Lanes
Vehicles Traveling At Right Angles To
The Vehicle
The system may temporarily react to a
06016S0005EM vehicle that is passing through the radar
Driving Around Wide Curves sensors operating range at right angles.
06016S0006EM
The Vehicle Ahead Is Leaving A
Driving Near Small Vehicles
Roundabout
On a roundabout, the system could Lane Change By Other Vehicles
intervene if it detects a vehicle ahead Vehicles suddenly changing lanes to enter
which is leaving the roundabout. the same lane as your vehicle within the
operating range of the radar sensor, may
cause the system to intervene.

06016S0008EM
Other Vehicle Passing Through Radar
Range

06016S0010EM
Driving In Roundabouts

96
General Information inflation tire pressure. This is defined as
the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
Warning! The following regulatory statement been driven for at least three hours, or
applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
devices equipped in this vehicle: three hour period. The cold tire inflation
The system has not been designed to
prevent impacts and cannot detect possible This device complies with Part 15 of the pressure must not exceed the maximum
conditions leading to an accident in FCC Rules and with Industry Canada inflation pressure molded into the tire
advance. Failure to take into account this license-exempt RSS standard(s). sidewall. Refer to Tires in Servicing
warning may lead to serious or fatal injuries. Operation is subject to the following two And Maintenance for information on
The system may activate, assessing the conditions: how to properly inflate the vehicles tires.
trajectory of the vehicle, for the presence of The tire pressure will also increase as the
1. This device may not cause harmful
reflecting metal objects different from vehicle is driven. This is normal, and there
other vehicles, such as safety barriers, road interference.
should be no adjustment for this
signs, barriers before parking lots, tollgates, 2. This device must accept any increased pressure.
level crossings, gates, railways, objects near
interference received, including The TPMS will signal the driver if
road constructions sites or higher than the
vehicle (e.g. a fly-over). In the same way, the interference that may cause undesired pressure falls below the warning limit for
system may intervene inside multi-story operation. any reason, including the effects of low
parking lots or tunnels, or due to a glare on Note: Changes or modifications not temperature and normal loss of pressure
the road surface. These possible activations expressly approved by the party from the tire.
are a consequence of the real driving The TPMS will stop indicating insufficient
responsible for compliance could void the
scenario coverage by the system and must
users authority to operate the tire pressure when pressure is equal to or
not be regarded as faults.
equipment. greater than the prescribed cold inflation
The system has been designed for road level. Therefore, if insufficient tire
use only. If the vehicle is driven on a track, Tire Pressure Monitoring System pressure is indicated by the ( ) warning
the system must be deactivated to avoid (TPMS) light displaying in the instrument cluster,
unnecessary warnings. Automatic This vehicle is equipped with a Tire increase the inflation pressure up to the
deactivation is signaled by the dedicated Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that
warning light/symbol switching on in the prescribed cold inflation value.
instrument panel (refer to the instructions in
sends the inflation pressure information The system will automatically update,
the "Warning Lights And Messages On The of each tire to the control unit, and will and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Instrument Panel" in "Getting To Know Your signal the driver in the event of Light will turn off once the system
Instrument Panel" for further information). insufficient tire pressure. receives the updated tire pressures. The
Tire pressure will vary with temperature vehicle may need to be driven for up to
by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
12F (6.5C). This means that when the order for the TPMS to receive this
outside temperature decreases, the tire information.
pressure will also decrease. Tire pressure
should always be set based on cold
97
Operating Example INSUFFICIENT TIRE PRESSURE
SAFETY

For example, your vehicle may have a INDICATION


Caution!
recommended cold (parked for more than If an insufficient pressure value is
three hours) placard pressure of 33 psi detected on one or more tires, the
(227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is The TPMS has been optimized for the warning light in the instrument cluster
68F (20C), and the measured tire original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS will display alongside the dedicated
pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a pressures and warning have been messages, the system will highlight the
temperature drop to 20F (-7C) will established for the tire size equipped on tire or tires with insufficient pressure
decrease the tire pressure to your vehicle. Undesirable system operation graphically, and an acoustic signal will be
or sensor damage may result when using
approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire emitted.
replacement equipment that is not of the
pressure is low enough to turn on the same size, type, and/or style. The TPM In this case, stop the vehicle, check the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Warning Light. sensor is not designed for use on inflation pressure of each tire, and inflate
Driving the vehicle may cause the tire aftermarket wheels and may contribute to a the necessary tire or tires to the correct
pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi poor overall system performance or sensor cold inflation pressure value, shown on
(193 kPa), but the Tire Pressure damage. Customers are encouraged to use the display or in the dedicated TPMS
Monitoring Telltale Light will still be on. OEM wheels to assure proper TPM feature menu.
In this situation, the Tire Pressure operation.
Monitoring Warning Light will turn off TPMS TEMPORARILY DISABLED
Using aftermarket tire sealants may
only after the tires are inflated to the cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS Check Message
vehicles recommended cold placard (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After When a system fault is detected, the Tire
pressure value. using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
recommended that you take your vehicle to
your authorized dealer to have your sensor flash on and off for 75 seconds, and then
function checked. remain on solid. The system fault will also
sound a chime. If the ignition is cycled,
After inspecting or adjusting the tire this sequence will repeat, provided that
pressure always reinstall the valve stem the system fault still exists. The Tire
cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
entering the valve stem, which could
damage the TPMS sensor. turn off when the fault condition no
longer exists. A system fault can occur
due to any of the following:
Jamming due to electronic devices or
driving next to facilities emitting the
same radio frequencies as the TPMS
sensors.

98
Installing some form of aftermarket Beginning with the next ignition switch Note:
window tinting that affects radio wave cycle, the TPMS will no longer chime or
The TPMS is not intended to replace
signals. display the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM
normal tire care and maintenance, or to
message in the instrument cluster.
Accumulation of snow or ice around provide warning of a tire failure or
Instead, dashes (--) will remain in place of
the wheels or wheel housings. condition.
the pressure values.
Using tire chains on the vehicle. To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four The TPMS should not be used as a
wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) tire pressure gauge while adjusting your
Using wheels/tires not equipped with
with tires equipped with TPM sensors. tire pressure.
TPMS sensors.
Then, drive the vehicle for up to Driving on a significantly
After the punctured tire has been 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The
repaired with the original tire sealant underinflated tire will cause the tire to
TPMS will chime, the "TPM Telltale Light" overheat, and can lead to tire failure.
contained in the Tire Repair Kit, the will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
previous condition must be restored so Underinflation also reduces fuel
then turn off. The instrument cluster will efficiency and tire tread life, and may
that the warning light is off during display the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM
normal driving. affect the vehicles handling and
message and then display pressure stopping ability.
TPMS Deactivation values in place of the dashes. On the next
ignition switch cycle the "SERVICE TPM The TPMS is not a substitute for
The TPMS can be deactivated by proper tire maintenance, and it is the
replacing all four wheel and tire SYSTEM" message will no longer be
displayed, as long as no system fault drivers responsibility to maintain
assemblies (road tires) with wheel and correct tire pressure using an accurate
tire assemblies that do not have TPMS exists.
tire pressure gauge, even if
Sensors, such as when installing winter underinflation has not reached the level
wheel and tire assemblies on your to trigger illumination of the Tire
vehicle. Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.
To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all
four wheel and tire assemblies (road Seasonal temperature changes will
tires) with tires not equipped with Tire affect tire pressure, and the TPMS will
Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors. monitor the actual tire pressure in the
Then, drive the vehicle for 20 minutes tire.
above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will
chime, the "TPM Telltale Light" will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on. The instrument cluster will
display the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM
message and then display dashes (--) in
place of the pressure values.
99
General Information OCCUPANT RESTRAINT 2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in
SAFETY

SYSTEMS a rear-facing child restraint) must ride in


The following regulatory statement the front passenger seat, move the seat
applies to all radio frequency (RF) Some of the most important safety as far back as possible and use the
devices equipped in this vehicle: features in your vehicle are the restraint proper child restraint (refer to Child
This device complies with Part 15 of the systems: Restraints in this section for further
FCC rules and RSS-210 of Industry Occupant Restraint Systems Features information).
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: Seat Belt Systems 3. Children that are not big enough to
wear the vehicle seat belt properly (refer
(1) This device may not cause harmful Supplemental Restraint Systems to Child Restraints in this section for
interference. (SRS) Air Bags further information) should be secured in
(2) This device must accept any Child Restraints a vehicle with a rear seat in child
interference received, including restraints or belt-positioning booster
interference that may cause undesired Some of the safety features described in seats. Older children who do not use child
operation. this section may be standard equipment restraints or belt-positioning booster
Note: Changes or modifications not on some models, or may be optional seats should ride properly buckled up in a
expressly approved by the party equipment on others. If you are not sure, vehicle with a rear seat.
responsible for compliance could void the ask your authorized dealer.
users authority to operate the 4. Never allow children to slide the
Important Safety Precautions shoulder belt behind them or under their
equipment.
Please pay close attention to the arm.
information in this section. It tells you 5. You should read the instructions
how to use your restraint system provided with your child restraint to
properly, to keep you and your make sure that you are using it properly.
passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take 6. All occupants should always wear
to minimize the risk of harm from a their lap and shoulder belts properly.
deploying air bag: 7. The driver and front passenger seats
1. Children 12 years old and under should be moved back as far as practical
should always ride buckled up in a vehicle to allow the front air bags room to inflate.
with a rear seat. 8. Do not lean against the door or
window. If your vehicle has side air bags,
and deployment occurs, the side air bags
will inflate forcefully into the space
between occupants and the door and
occupants could be injured.
100
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder BeltAlert Warning Sequence
needs to be modified to accommodate a System (BeltAlert) The BeltAlert warning sequence is
disabled person, refer to the Customer activated when the vehicle is moving
Assistance section for customer service Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if above a specified vehicle speed range
contact information. equipped) No Deactivation and the driver or outboard front seat
BeltAlert is a feature intended to passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with
remind the driver and outboard front outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
Warning! seat passenger (if equipped with (the outboard front passenger seat
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) BeltAlert is not active when the outboard
to buckle their seat belts. The Belt Alert front passenger seat is unoccupied). The
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in feature is active whenever the ignition BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger switch is in the START or ON/RUN blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and
front air bag can cause death or serious position. sounding an intermittent chime. Once the
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child Initial Indication BeltAlert warning sequence has
restraint. completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
If the driver is unbuckled when the will remain on until the seat belts are
Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a ignition switch is first in the START or buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence
vehicle with a rear seat. ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for a may repeat based on vehicle speed until
few seconds. If the driver or outboard the driver and occupied outboard front
Seat Belt Systems front seat passenger (if equipped with seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) The driver should instruct all occupants
Buckle up even though you are an is unbuckled when the ignition switch is to buckle their seat belts.
excellent driver, even on short trips. first in the START or ON/RUN position
Someone on the road may be a poor the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on Change of Status
driver and could cause a collision that and remain on until both outboard front If the driver or outboard front seat
includes you. This can happen far away seat belts are buckled. The outboard passenger (if equipped with outboard
from home or on your own street. front passenger seat BeltAlert is not front passenger seat BeltAlert)
Research has shown that seat belts save active when an outboard front passenger unbuckles their seat belt while the
lives, and they can reduce the seat is unoccupied. vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning
seriousness of injuries in a collision. sequence will begin until the seat belts
Some of the worst injuries happen when are buckled again.
people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat The outboard front passenger seat
belts reduce the possibility of ejection BeltAlert is not active when the outboard
and the risk of injury caused by striking front passenger seat is unoccupied.
the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a BeltAlert may be triggered when an
motor vehicle should be belted at all animal or other items are placed on the
times. outboard front passenger seat or when
101
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is
SAFETY

It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, A twisted seat belt may not protect you
recommended that pets be restrained in inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, properly. In a collision, it could even cut into
the rear seat (if equipped) in pet people riding in these areas are more likely you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against your
harnesses or pet carriers that are to be seriously injured or killed. body, without twists. If you cant straighten
secured by seat belts, and cargo is Do not allow people to ride in any area of
a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to your
properly stowed. authorized dealer immediately and have it
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats fixed.
and seat belts.
Lap/Shoulder Belts A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a buckle will not protect you properly. The lap
All seating positions in your vehicle are seat and using a seat belt properly.
equipped with lap/shoulder belts. portion could ride too high on your body,
Occupants, including the driver, should possibly causing internal injuries. Always
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock always wear their seat belts whether or not buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest
only during very sudden stops or an air bag is also provided at their seating you.
collisions. This feature allows the position to minimize the risk of severe injury
or death in the event of a crash. A seat belt that is too loose will not
shoulder part of the seat belt to move protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you
freely with you under normal conditions. Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could could move too far forward, increasing the
However, in a collision the seat belt will make your injuries in a collision much worse. possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt
lock and reduce your risk of striking the You might suffer internal injuries, or you snugly.
inside of the vehicle or being thrown out could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow
these instructions to wear your seat belt A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
of the vehicle. safely and to keep your passengers safe, dangerous. Your body could strike the inside
too. surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,
increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt
Warning! Two people should never be belted into a worn under the arm can cause internal
single seat belt. People belted together can injuries. Ribs arent as strong as shoulder
crash into one another in a collision, hurting bones. Wear the seat belt over your
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder shoulder so that your strongest bones will
more severe injuries in a collision. The air belt or a lap belt for more than one person, take the force in a collision.
bags work with your seat belt to restrain no matter what their size.
you properly. In some collisions, the air bags A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
wont deploy at all. Always wear your seat protect you from injury during a collision.
belt even though you have air bags. You are more likely to hit your head in a
Warning! collision if you do not wear your shoulder
In a collision, you and your passengers can belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to
suffer much greater injuries if you are not be used together.
properly buckled up. You can strike the A lap belt worn too high can increase the
interior of your vehicle or other passengers, A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart
risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt
or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. in a collision and leave you with no
forces wont be at the strong hip and pelvic
Always be sure you and others in your protection. Inspect the seat belt system
bones, but across your abdomen. Always
vehicle are buckled up properly. periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as
loose parts. Damaged parts must be
possible and keep it snug.
102
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble 4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting
or modify the seat belt system. Seat belt and lies low across your hips, below your Procedure
assemblies must be replaced after a abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt
collision. portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To Use the following procedure to untwist a
loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the twisted lap/shoulder belt.
latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under
1. Position the latch plate as close as
Instructions possible to the anchor point.
the seat belt in a collision.
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. 2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm)
5. Position the shoulder belt across the
Sit back and adjust the seat. above the latch plate, grasp and twist the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
seat belt webbing 180 degrees to create
slack so that it is comfortable and not
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the a fold that begins immediately above the
resting on your neck. The retractor will
back of the front seat, and next to your latch plate.
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the
6. To release the seat belt, push the red
latch plate and pull out the seat belt. folded webbing. The folded webbing
button on the buckle. The seat belt will
Slide the latch plate up the webbing as must enter the slot at the top of the latch
automatically retract to its stowed
far as necessary to allow the seat belt to plate.
position. If necessary, slide the latch
go around your lap. plate down the webbing to allow the seat 4. Continue to slide the latch plate up
belt to retract fully. until it clears the folded webbing and the
3. When the seat belt is long enough to
fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle seat belt is no longer twisted.
until you hear a click.

06046S0001NA
Seat Belt Latch Plate Inserted Into Seat
Belt Buckle

103
Second Row Center Seat Belt The second row center seat belt features 7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug
SAFETY

Operating Instructions a seat belt with a mini-latch plate and and lies low across your hips, below your
buckle, which allows the seat belt to abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt
detach from the lower anchor when the portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To
seat is folded. The mini-latch plate and loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on
regular latch plate can then be stored out the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the
of the way in the parcel tray for added risk of sliding under the seat belt in a
convenience to open up utilization of the collision.
storage areas behind the front seats
when the seat is not occupied. 8. Position the shoulder belt on your
chest so that it is comfortable and not
1. Remove the mini-latch plate and resting on your neck. The retractor will
regular latch plate from its stowed withdraw any slack in the seat belt.
position in the right rear side trim panel.
9. To release the seat belt, push the red
2. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull the button on the buckle.
seat belt over the seat.
10. To disengage the mini-latch plate
3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside from the mini-buckle for storage, insert
of the right head restraint. the regular latch plate into the black
button on the top of the mini-buckle. The
4. When the seat belt is long enough to seat belt will automatically retract to its
fit, insert the mini-latch plate into the stowed position. If necessary, slide the
mini-buckle until you hear a click. latch plate down the webbing to allow the
5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch seat belt to retract fully. Insert the
plate up the webbing as far as necessary mini-latch plate and regular latch plate
to allow the seat belt to go around your into its stowed position.
06056S0002EM
Second Row Seat Belts lap.

1 Seat Belt 2 Seat Belt 6. When the seat belt is long enough to
Warning!
Buckle Latch Plate fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
3 Mini Latch 4 Mini Seat Belt
Plate Buckle If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are
not properly connected when the seat belt is
5 Mini Buckle used by an occupant, the seat belt will not
Release be able to provide proper restraint and will
increase the risk of injury in a collision.

104
When reattaching the mini-latch plate and designed to remove slack from the seat Vehicle Seat Belt under the Child
mini-buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is belt in the event of a collision. These Restraints section of this manual. The
not twisted. If the webbing is twisted, follow devices may improve the performance of figure below illustrates the locking
the preceding procedure to detach the the seat belt by removing slack from the feature for each seating position.
mini-latch plate and mini-buckle, untwist the seat belt early in a collision.
webbing, and reattach the mini-latch plate Pretensioners work for all size
and mini-buckle. occupants, including those in child
restraints.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women Note: These devices are not a substitute
for proper seat belt placement by the
occupant. The seat belt still must be worn
snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). 06086S0102NA

Like the air bags, the pretensioners are ALR Switchable Automatic Locking
single use items. A deployed Retractor
pretensioner or a deployed air bag must If the passenger seating position is
be replaced immediately. equipped with an ALR and is being used
for normal usage, only pull the seat belt
0226075266 Energy Management Feature webbing out far enough to comfortably
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
The front seat belt system is equipped wrap around the occupants mid-section
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants with an Energy Management feature that so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR
including pregnant women: the risk of may help further reduce the risk of injury is activated, you will hear a clicking sound
injury in the event of an accident is in the event of a collision. The seat belt as the seat belt retracts. Allow the
reduced for the mother and the unborn system has a retractor assembly that is webbing to retract completely in this
child if they are wearing a seat belt. designed to release webbing in a case and then carefully pull out only the
Position the lap belt snug and low below controlled manner. amount of webbing necessary to
the abdomen and across the strong comfortably wrap around the occupants
bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt Switchable Automatic Locking mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the
across the chest and away from the neck. Retractors (ALR) buckle until you hear a "click."
Never place the shoulder belt behind the In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder
back or under the arm. The seat belts in the passenger seating
belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat
positions are equipped with a Switchable
belt will still retract to remove any slack
Seat Belt Pretensioner Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which
in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic
is used to secure a child restraint system.
The front seat belt system is equipped Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is
For additional information, refer to
with pretensioning devices that are installed in a seating position that has a
Installing Child Restraints Using The
105
seat belt with this feature. Children and activate the vehicle sensitive may be equipped with the following Air
SAFETY

12 years old and under should always be (emergency) locking mode. Bag System Components:
properly restrained in a vehicle with a
rear seat. Air Bag System Components
Warning! Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Warning! Air Bag Warning Light
The seat belt assembly must be replaced
if the switchable Automatic Locking Steering Wheel and Column
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat Instrument Panel
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger belt function is not working properly when
front air bag can cause death or serious checked according to the procedures in the Knee Impact Bolsters
injury to a child 12 years or younger, Service Manual.
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
including a child in a rear-facing child Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
restraint. could increase the risk of injury in collisions. Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode Supplemental Side Air Bags
vehicle with a rear seat. to restrain occupants who are wearing the
seat belt or children who are using booster
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
How To Engage The Automatic Locking seats. The locked mode is only used to Front and Side Impact Sensors
install rear-facing or forward-facing child
Mode restraints that have a harness for Seat Belt Pretensioners
1. Buckle the combination lap and restraining the child.
Seat Track Position Sensors
shoulder belt.
Supplemental Restraint Systems Air Bag Warning Light
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until the entire seat belt is (SRS)
extracted. Some of the safety features described in
this section may be standard equipment
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the The ORC monitors the readiness of the
on some models, or may be optional
seat belt retracts, you will hear a clicking electronic parts of the air bag system
equipment on others. If you are not sure,
sound. This indicates the seat belt is now whenever the ignition switch is in the
ask your authorized dealer.
in the Automatic Locking Mode. START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition
The air bag system must be ready to switch is in the OFF position or in the ACC
How To Disengage The Automatic protect you in a collision. The Occupant
Locking Mode position, the air bag system is not on and
Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the the air bags will not inflate.
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder internal circuits and interconnecting
belt and allow it to retract completely to wiring associated with the electrical Air The ORC contains a backup power supply
disengage the Automatic Locking Mode Bag System Components. Your vehicle system that may deploy the air bag

106
system even if the battery loses power or Note: If the speedometer, tachometer, Warning Light comes on intermittently or
it becomes disconnected prior to or any engine related gauges are not remains on while driving have an
deployment. working, the Occupant Restraint authorized dealer service the vehicle
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In immediately. For additional information
Light in the instrument panel for this condition the air bags may not be regarding the Redundant Air Bag Warning
approximately four to eight seconds for a ready to inflate for your protection. Have Light refer to Getting To Know Your
self-check when the ignition switch is an authorized dealer service the air bag Instrument Panel section of this manual.
first in the ON/RUN position. After the system immediately.
Front Air Bags
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will
turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction This vehicle has front air bags and
in any part of the system, it turns on the Warning! lap/shoulder belts for both the driver and
Air Bag Warning Light, either front passenger. The front air bags are a
momentarily or continuously. A single supplement to the seat belt restraint
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
chime will sound to alert you if the light systems. The driver front air bag is
instrument panel could mean you wont have
comes on again after initial startup. the air bag system to protect you in a mounted in the center of the steering
The ORC also includes diagnostics that collision. If the light does not come on as a wheel. The passenger front air bag is
will illuminate the instrument panel Air bulb check when the ignition is first turned mounted in the instrument panel, above
Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if the glove compartment. The words SRS
detected that could affect the air bag it comes on as you drive, have an authorized AIRBAG or AIRBAG are embossed on
system. The diagnostics also record the dealer service the air bag system the air bag covers.
immediately.
nature of the malfunction. While the air
bag system is designed to be
maintenance free, if any of the following Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
occurs, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
come on during the four to eight seconds detected, which could affect the
when the ignition switch is first in the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS),
ON/RUN position. the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on illuminate on the instrument panel. The
after the four to eight-second interval. Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will 06106S0001EM
stay on until the fault is cleared. In Driver Air Bag
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on addition, a single chime will sound to alert
intermittently or remains on while you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning
driving. Light has come on and a fault has been
detected. If the Redundant Air Bag
107
collisions. A higher energy output is used
SAFETY

for more severe collisions.


Warning!
This vehicle may be equipped with a
driver and/or front passenger seat belt
Being too close to the steering wheel or buckle switch that detects whether the
instrument panel during front air bag driver or front passenger seat belt is
deployment could cause serious injury, buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may
including death. Air bags need room to adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending
Front Air Bags.
your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel. This vehicle may be equipped with driver
06106S0002EM and/or front passenger seat track
Never place a rear-facing child restraint
Passenger Air Bag position sensors that may adjust the
in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air
injury to a child 12 years or younger, Bags based upon seat position.
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a Warning!
vehicle with a rear seat.
No objects should be placed over or near
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag the air bag on the instrument panel or
steering wheel because any such objects
Features could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has collision severe enough to cause the air bag
to inflate.
multistage driver and front passenger air
0502122443US bags. This system provides output Do not put anything on or around the air
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations appropriate to the severity and type of bag covers or attempt to open them
collision as determined by the Occupant manually. You may damage the air bags and
1 Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags you could be injured because the air bags
Restraint Controller (ORC), which may
2 Driver And Passenger Knee Impact may no longer be functional. The protective
receive information from the front covers for the air bag cushions are designed
Bolsters/Supplemental Knee Air Bags
impact sensors (if equipped) or other to open only when the air bags are inflating.
system components.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
The first stage inflator is triggered more severe injuries in a collision. The air
immediately during an impact that bags work with your seat belt to restrain
requires air bag deployment. A low you properly. In some collisions, air bags
energy output is used in less severe wont deploy at all. Always wear your seat
belts even though you have air bags.
108
Front Air Bag Operation than it takes to blink your eyes. The front
air bags then quickly deflate while
Front Air Bags are designed to provide helping to restrain the driver and front
additional protection by supplementing passenger.
the seat belts. Front air bags are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in Knee Impact Bolsters
rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front
air bags will not deploy in all frontal The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect
collisions, including some that may the knees of the driver and front
produce substantial vehicle damage passenger, and position the front
for example, some pole collisions, truck occupants for improved interaction with
underrides, and angle offset collisions. the front air bags. 06096S0102NA

On the other hand, depending on the type Driver Knee Air Bag
and location of impact, front air bags may
Warning!
deploy in crashes with little vehicle
front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration. Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle impact bolsters in any way.
deceleration over time, vehicle speed and Do not mount any accessories to the knee
damage by themselves are not good impact bolsters such as alarm lights,
indicators of whether or not an air bag stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
should have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your Supplemental Driver And Front
protection in all collisions, and also are
needed to help keep you in position, away Passenger Knee Air Bags
06096S0103NA
from an inflating air bag. This vehicle is equipped with a Front Passenger Knee Air Bag
When the ORC detects a collision Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
requiring the front air bags, it signals the mounted in the instrument panel below Supplemental Side Air Bags
inflator units. A large quantity of the steering column and a Supplemental Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Passenger Knee Air Bag mounted in the Bags (SABs)
front air bags. instrument panel below the glove
compartment. The Supplemental Knee This vehicle is equipped with
The steering wheel hub trim cover and
Air Bags provide enhanced protection Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air
the upper right side of the instrument
during a frontal impact by working Bags (SABs).
panel separate and fold out of the way as
the air bags inflate to their full size. The together with the seat belts, Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air
front air bags fully inflate in less time pretensioners, and front air bags. Bags (SABs) are located in the outboard
side of the front seats. The SABs are
109
marked with a SRS AIRBAG or outboard occupants in certain side
SAFETY

AIRBAG label sewn into the outboard impacts, in addition to the injury
Warning!
side of the seats. reduction potential provided by the seat
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of belts and body structure.
occupant injury during certain side Do not use accessory seat covers or place The SABIC deploys downward, covering
impacts, in addition to the injury objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the side windows. An inflating SABIC
reduction potential provided by the seat the performance could be adversely pushes the outside edge of the headliner
belts and body structure. affected and/or objects could be pushed into out of the way and covers the window.
you, causing serious injury.
The SABICs inflate with enough force to
injure occupants if they are not belted
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable and seated properly, or if items are
Curtains (SABICs) positioned in the area where the SABICs
This vehicle is equipped with inflate. Children are at an even greater
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
Curtains (SABICs). The SABICs may help reduce the risk of
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable partial or complete ejection of vehicle
Curtains (SABICs) are located above the occupants through side windows in
side windows. The trim covering the certain side impact events.
06106S0004EM
SABICs is labeled SRS AIRBAG or
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side AIRBAG. Warning!
Air Bag
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam Do not mount equipment, or stack
on the outboard side of the seatbacks luggage or other cargo up high enough to
trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys block the deployment of the SABICs. The
through the seat seam into the space trim covering above the side windows where
between the occupant and the door. The the SABIC and its deployment path are
SAB moves at a very high speed and with located should remain free from any
such a high force that it could injure obstructions.
occupants if they are not seated In order for the SABICs to work as
properly, or if items are positioned in the intended, do not install any accessory items
area where the SAB inflates. Children are 06106S0005EM in your vehicle which could alter the roof. Do
at an even greater risk of injury from a Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable not add an aftermarket sunroof to your
deploying air bag. Curtain (SABIC) Location vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require
permanent attachments (bolts or screws)
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not
and other injuries to front and rear seat drill into the roof of the vehicle for any
reason.
110
Side Impacts Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could
The Side Air Bags are designed to Warning! lead to more severe injuries in a collision.
activate in certain side impacts. The The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) to restrain you properly. In some collisions,
determines whether the deployment of Occupants, including children, who are up Side Air Bags wont deploy at all. Always
the Side Air Bags in a particular impact against or very close to Side Air Bags can be wear your seat belt even though you have
seriously injured or killed. Occupants, Side Air Bags.
event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. The side including children, should never lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or
impact sensors aid the ORC in Note: Air bag covers may not be obvious
area where the side air bags inflate, even if
determining the appropriate response to they are in an infant or child restraint. in the interior trim, but they will open
impact events. The system is calibrated during air bag deployment.
to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact Seat belts (and child restraints where
Rollover Events
side of the vehicle during impacts that appropriate) are necessary for your
protection in all collisions. They also help Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
require Side Air Bag occupant protection. certain rollover events. The ORC
keep you in position, away from an inflating
In side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy Side Air Bag. To get the best protection determines whether the deployment of
independently; a left side impact deploys from the Side Air Bags, occupants must the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover
the left Side Air Bags only and a wear their seat belts properly and sit event is appropriate, based on the
right-side impact deploys the right Side upright with their backs against the seats. severity and type of collision. Vehicle
Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is Children must be properly restrained in a
damage by itself is not a good indicator
not a good indicator of whether or not child restraint or booster seat that is
appropriate for the size of the child. of whether or not Side Air Bags should
Side Air Bags should have deployed. have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all
side collisions, including some collisions rollover events. The rollover sensing
at certain angles, or some side collisions Warning! system determines if a rollover event
that do not impact the area of the may be in progress and whether
passenger compartment. The Side Air deployment is appropriate. In the event
Bags may deploy during angled or offset Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not
lean against the door or window. Sit upright the vehicle experiences a rollover or near
frontal collisions where the front air bags rollover event, and deployment of the
deploy. in the center of the seat.
Side Air Bags is appropriate, the rollover
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the Being too close to the Side Air Bags sensing system will also deploy the seat
seat belt restraint system. Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be
belt pretensioners on both sides of the
deploy in less time than it takes to blink severely injured or killed.
vehicle.
your eyes. The SABICs may help reduce the risk of
partial or complete ejection of vehicle
occupants through side windows in
certain rollover or side impact events.
111
Air Bag System Components If you do have a collision which deploys
SAFETY

Note: The Occupant Restraint Controller the air bags, any or all of the following
Warning!
(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and may occur:
interconnecting wiring associated with The air bag material may sometimes
electrical Air Bag System Components cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners
listed below: cannot protect you in another collision. Have
the occupants as the air bags deploy and
the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) unfold. The abrasions are similar to seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an
friction rope burns or those you might get authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the
Air Bag Warning Light sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. Occupant Restraint Controller System
Steering Wheel and Column They are not caused by contact with serviced as well.
chemicals. They are not permanent and
Instrument Panel normally heal quickly. However, if you
Note:
Knee Impact Bolsters havent healed significantly within a few
days, or if you have any blistering, see Air bag covers may not be obvious in
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags your doctor immediately. the interior trim, but they will open
during air bag deployment.
Seat Belt Buckle Switch As the air bags deflate, you may see
some smoke-like particles. The particles After any collision, the vehicle should
Supplemental Side Air Bags be taken to an authorized dealer
are a normal by-product of the process
Supplemental Knee Air Bags that generates the non-toxic gas used for immediately.
Front and Side Impact Sensors air bag inflation. These airborne particles
may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or Enhanced Accident Response
Seat Belt Pretensioners throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, System
Seat Track Position Sensors rinse the area with cool water. For nose
In the event of an impact, if the
or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If
communication network remains intact,
If A Deployment Occurs the irritation continues, see your doctor.
and the power remains intact, depending
If these particles settle on your clothing,
The front air bags are designed to deflate on the nature of the event, the ORC will
follow the garment manufacturers
immediately after deployment. determine whether to have the Enhanced
instructions for cleaning.
Accident Response System perform the
Note: Front and/or side air bags will not Do not drive your vehicle after the air following functions:
deploy in all collisions. This does not bags have deployed. If you are involved in
mean something is wrong with the air bag another collision, the air bags will not be Cut off fuel to the engine.
system. in place to protect you. Flash hazard lights as long as the
battery has power or until the hazard
light button is pressed. The hazard lights
can be deactivated by pressing the
hazard light button.
112
Turn on the interior lights, which Brake booster ignition AVV/START or MAR/ACC/ON/
remain on as long as the battery has RUN to ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK.
Electric park brake
power or for 15 minutes from the Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks
intervention of the Enhanced Accident Automatic transmission gear in the engine compartment and on the
Response System. selector ground near the engine compartment and
fuel tank before resetting the system and
Unlock the power door locks. Horn
starting the engine.
Turn off the Fuel Pump Heater (if Front wiper Depending on the nature of the event the
equipped). left and right turn signal lights, located in
Headlamp washer pump
Turn off the HVAC Blower Motor. the instrument panel, may both be
Enhanced Accident Response blinking and will continue to blink. In order
Cut off battery power to the: to move your vehicle to the side of the
System Reset Procedure
Engine road, you must follow the system reset
After the event occurs, when the system procedure.
Electric power steering is active, a message regarding fuel cutoff
is displayed. Turn the ignition switch from

Customer Action Customer Will See

Note:
Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds
1. Turn ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. (Turn Signal Must be placed in Neutral
State).
Right turn light BLINKS.
2. Turn ignition MAR/ACC/ON/RUN.
Left turn light is OFF.
Right turn light is ON SOLID.
3. Turn right turn signal switch ON.
Left turn light BLINKS.
Right turn light is OFF.
4. Place turn signal in neutral state.
Left turn light BLINKS.
Right turn light BLINKS.
5. Turn left turn signal switch ON.
Left turn light is ON SOLID.
Right turn light BLINKS.
6. Place turn signal in neutral state.
Left turn light is OFF.

113
SAFETY

Customer Action Customer Will See

Note:
Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds
Right turn light is ON SOLID.
7. Turn right turn signal switch ON.
Left turn light BLINKS.
Right turn light is OFF.
8. Place turn signal in neutral state.
Left turn light BLINKS.
Right turn light is ON SOLID.
9. Turn left turn signal switch ON.
Left turn light is ON SOLID.
10. Turn left turn signal switch OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Right turn light is OFF.
Neutral State). Left turn light is OFF.
11. Turn ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK.
12. Turn ignition MAR/ACC/ON/RUN. (Entire sequence needs to be
System is now reset and the engine may be started.
completed within one minute or sequence will need to be repeated).
Turn hazard flashers OFF (Manually).
If a reset procedure step is not completed within 60 seconds, then the turn signal lights will blink and the reset procedure must be
performed again in order to be successful.

114
Maintaining Your Air Bag System Event Data Recorder (EDR) data with the type of personally
identifying data routinely acquired during
This vehicle is equipped with an event a crash investigation.
Warning! data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
an EDR is to record, in certain crash or
equipment is required, and access to the
near crash-like situations, such as an air
Modifications to any part of the air bag vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition
bag deployment or hitting a road
system could cause it to fail when you need to the vehicle manufacturer, other
obstacle, data that will assist in
it. You could be injured if the air bag system parties, such as law enforcement, that
is not there to protect you. Do not modify understanding how a vehicles systems
have the special equipment, can read the
the components or wiring, including adding performed. The EDR is designed to
information if they have access to the
any kind of badges or stickers to the record data related to vehicle dynamics
vehicle or the EDR.
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper and safety systems for a short period of
right side of the instrument panel. Do not time, typically 30 seconds or less. The Child Restraints
modify the front bumper, vehicle body EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
structure, or add aftermarket side steps or Everyone in your vehicle needs to be
such data as:
running boards. buckled up at all times, including babies
How various systems in your vehicle and children. Every state in the United
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of
were operating; States, and every Canadian province,
the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell
anyone who works on your vehicle that it requires that small children ride in proper
Whether or not the driver and
has an air bag system. restraint systems. This is the law, and you
passenger safety belts were
can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your buckled/fastened;
air bag system. The air bag may inflate Children 12 years or younger should ride
How far (if at all) the driver was properly buckled up in a rear seat, if
accidentally or may not function properly if
modifications are made. Take your vehicle depressing the accelerator and/or brake available. According to crash statistics,
to an authorized dealer for any air bag pedal; and, children are safer when properly
system service. If your seat, including your How fast the vehicle was traveling. restrained in the rear seats rather than in
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced the front.
in any way (including removal or These data can help provide a better
loosening/tightening of seat attachment understanding of the circumstances in
bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized which crashes and injuries occur.
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat
Note: EDR data are recorded by your
accessories may be used. If it is necessary
to modify the air bag system for persons vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation
with disabilities, contact your authorized occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR
dealer. under normal driving conditions and no
personal data (e.g., name, gender, age,
and crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR
115
to the child almost large enough for an Note:
SAFETY

adult safety belt. Always check the child


Warning! For additional information, refer to
seat Owners Manual to make sure you
www.safercar.gov/parents/index.htm or
have the correct seat for your child.
call: 18883274236
In a collision, an unrestrained child can Carefully read and follow all the
become a projectile inside the vehicle. The instructions and warnings in the child Canadian residents should refer to
force required to hold even an infant on your restraint Owners Manual and on all the Transport Canadas website for
lap could become so great that you could not labels attached to the child restraint. additional information:
hold the child, no matter how strong you are. http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/
Before buying any restraint system,
The child and others could be badly injured or motorvehiclesafety/
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should make sure that it has a label certifying
that it meets all applicable Safety safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
be in a proper restraint for the childs size.
Standards. You should also make sure
that you can install it in the vehicle where
There are different sizes and types of you will use it.
restraints for children from newborn size

Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint


Children who are two years old or younger and Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Infants and Toddlers who have not reached the height or weight Restraint, facing rearward in the rear seat of
limits of their child restraint the vehicle
Children who are at least two years old or who Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
Small Children have out-grown the height or weight limit of five-point Harness, facing forward in the rear
their rear-facing child restraint seat of the vehicle
Children who have out-grown their
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle
Larger Children forward-facing child restraint, but are too small
seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle
to properly fit the vehicles seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of the
Children Too Large for Child Restraints out-grown the height or weight limit of their
vehicle
booster seat

116
Infant And Child Restraints Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat. Warning!
Safety experts recommend that children
ride rear-facing in the vehicle until they
are two years old or until they reach Older Children And Child Restraints Improper installation can lead to failure
either the height or weight limit of their of an infant or child restraint. It could come
rear-facing child restraint. Two types of Children who are two years old or who
loose in a collision. The child could be badly
child restraints can be used rear-facing: have outgrown their rear-facing
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
infant carriers and convertible child convertible child seat can ride manufacturers directions exactly when
seats. forward-facing in the vehicle. installing an infant or child restraint.
Forward-facing child seats and
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing After a child restraint is installed in the
convertible child seats used in the
in the vehicle. It is recommended for vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat
forward-facing direction are for children
children from birth until they reach the forward or rearward because it can loosen
who are over two years old or who have the child restraint attachments. Remove the
weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
outgrown the rear-facing weight or child restraint before adjusting the vehicle
Convertible child seats can be used either
height limit of their rear-facing seat position. When the vehicle seat has
rear-facing or forward-facing in the
convertible child seat. Children should been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
vehicle. Convertible child seats often
remain in a forward-facing child seat with
have a higher weight limit in the When your child restraint is not in use,
a harness for as long as possible, up to secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or
rear-facing direction than infant carriers
the highest weight or height allowed by LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the
do, so they can be used rear-facing by
the child seat. vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In
children who have outgrown their infant
All children whose weight or height is a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the
carrier but are still less than at least two
above the forward-facing limit for the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious
years old. Children should remain personal injury.
rear-facing until they reach the highest child seat should use a belt-positioning
weight or height allowed by their booster seat until the vehicles seat belts
convertible child seat. fit properly. If the child cannot sit with Children Too Large For Booster
knees bent over the vehicles seat Seats
cushion while the childs back is against
Warning! the seatback, they should use a Children who are large enough to wear
belt-positioning booster seat. The child the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose
and belt-positioning booster seat are legs are long enough to bend over the
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in held in the vehicle by the seat belt. front of the seat when their back is
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger against the seatback, should use the seat
front air bag can cause death or serious belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step
injury to a child 12 years or younger, test to decide whether the child can use
including a child in a rear-facing child the vehicles seat belt alone:
restraint.

117
1. Can the child sit all the way back 5. Can the child stay seated like this for
SAFETY

against the back of the vehicle seat? the whole trip?


Warning!
2. Do the childs knees bend comfortably If the answer to any of these questions
over the front of the vehicle seat while was no, then the child still needs to use a
booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
the child is still sitting all the way back?
using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the the shoulder belt will not protect a child
belt fit periodically and make sure the
childs shoulder between their neck and properly, which may result in serious injury or
seat belt buckle is latched. A childs death. A child must always wear both the lap
arm? squirming or slouching can move the belt and shoulder portions of the seat belt
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as out of position. If the shoulder belt correctly.
possible, touching the childs thighs and contacts the face or neck, move the child
not the stomach? closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a booster seat to position the seat belt
on the child correctly.

Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints

Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An X Below


Combined Weight of
Restraint Type the Child + Child LATCH Lower
LATCH Lower Seat Belt + Top
Restraint Seat Belt Only Anchors + Top Tether
Anchors Only Tether Anchor
Anchor
Rear-Facing Child
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X
Restraint
Rear-Facing Child More than 65 lbs
X
Restraint (29.5 kg)
Forward-Facing Child
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X
Restraint
Forward-Facing Child More than 65 lbs
X
Restraint (29.5 kg)

118
Lower Anchors And Tethers For system has three vehicle anchor points LATCH Positions For Installing Child
CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System for installing LATCH-equipped child Restraints In This Vehicle
seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion
where it meets the seatback and one top
tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are
used to install LATCH-equipped child
seats without using the vehicles seat
belts. Some seating positions may have a
022668173 top tether anchorage but no lower
LATCH Label anchorages. In these seating positions,
Your vehicle is equipped with the child the seat belt must be used with the top 06086S0101NA

restraint anchorage system called tether anchorage to install the child LATCH Positions
LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors restraint. Please see the following table Lower Anchorage Symbol
and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH for more information. (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH


Use the LATCH anchorage system until the
combined weight of the child and the child
What is the weight limit (childs weight + weight
restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
of the child restraint) for using the LATCH 65 lbs (29.5 kg)
and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system
anchorage system to attach the child restraint?
once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint.
used together to attach a rear-facing or No Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH
forward-facing child restraint? anchorages if allowed by the booster seat
manufacturer. See your booster seat owners
manual for more information.

119
SAFETY

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH


Can a child seat be installed in the center
Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a
position using the inner LATCH lower No
child seat in the center seating position.
anchorage?
Never share a LATCH anchorage with two or
more child restraints. If the center position
does not have dedicated LATCH lower
Can two child restraints be attached using a
No anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child
common lower LATCH anchorage?
seat in the center position next to a child seat
using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard
position.
The child seat may touch the back of the front
passenger seat if the child restraint
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
Yes manufacturer also allows contact. See your
back of the front passenger seat?
child restraint owners manual for more
information.
Only the center head restraint (if equipped) can
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes
be removed.

Locating The LATCH Anchorages Locating The Upper Tether


The lower anchorages Anchorages
are round bars that are There are tether strap
found at the rear of the anchorages behind each
seat cushion where it rear seating position
meets the seatback. located in the panel
Each anchorage is between the rear
under a cover with the seatback and the rear
anchorage symbol on it. window. They are found
Lift the cover to access the lower under a plastic cover
anchorage. 06086S0009EM
with the tether anchorage symbol on it.
LATCH Anchorage Locations
1 LATCH Anchorage Bar
2 LATCH Anchorage Locations

120
Center Seat LATCH 1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower
straps and on the tether strap of the child
seat so that you can more easily attach
Warning! the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.

Do not install a child restraint in the 2. Place the child seat between the
center position using the LATCH system. lower anchorages for that seating
This position is not approved for installing position. For some second row seats, you
child seats using the LATCH attachments. may need to recline the seat and / or raise
You must use the seat belt and tether the head restraint to get a better fit. If
06086S0104NA anchor to install a child seat in the center the rear seat can be moved forward and
Upper Tether Anchorage Location seating position. rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
LATCH-compatible child restraint Never use the same lower anchorage to move it to its rear-most position to make
systems will be equipped with a rigid bar attach more than one child restraint. Please room for the child seat. You may also
or a flexible strap on each side. Each will
refer to Installing The LATCH-Compatible move the front seat forward to allow
Child Restraint System for typical more room for the child seat.
have a hook or connector to attach to the installation instructions.
lower anchorage and a way to tighten the 3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors
connection to the anchorage. of the child restraint to the lower
Forward-facing child restraints and some Always follow the directions of the child anchorages in the selected seating
rear-facing child restraints will also be restraint manufacturer when installing position.
equipped with a tether strap. The tether your child restraint. Not all child restraint
strap will have a hook at the end to attach systems will be installed as described 4. If the child restraint has a tether
to the top tether anchorage and a way to here. strap, connect it to the top tether
tighten the strap after it is attached to anchorage. See the section Installing
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Child Restraints Using the Top Tether
the anchorage.
Restraint Anchorage for directions to attach a
tether anchor.
If the selected seating position has a
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor 5. Tighten all of the straps as you push
(ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt, the child restraint rearward and
following the instructions below. See the downward into the seat. Remove slack in
section Installing Child Restraints Using the straps according to the child restraint
the Vehicle Seat Belt to check what type manufacturers instructions.
of seat belt each seating position has.

121
6. Test that the child restraint is a clicking noise while the webbing is
SAFETY

Child restraint anchorages are designed


installed tightly by pulling back and forth to withstand only those loads imposed by pulled back into the retractor. Refer to
on the child seat at the belt path. It should correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no the Automatic Locking Mode
not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in circumstances are they to be used for adult description in Switchable Automatic
any direction. seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other Locking Retractors (ALR) under
items or equipment to the vehicle. Occupant Restraint Systems for
How To Stow An Unused additional information on ALR.
Switchable-ALR (ALR) Seat Belt: Installing Child Restraints Using Please see the table below and the
The Vehicle Seat Belt following sections for more information.
When using the LATCH attaching system
to install a child restraint, stow all ALR Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For
Child restraint systems are designed to
seat belts that are not being used by Installing Child Restraints In This
be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or
other occupants or being used to secure
child restraints. An unused belt could
the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt. Vehicle
injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor.
Before installing a child restraint using Warning!
the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt
behind the child restraint and out of the Improper installation or failure to
childs reach. If the buckled seat belt properly secure a child restraint can lead to
interferes with the child restraint failure of the restraint. The child could be
installation, instead of buckling it behind badly injured or killed.
the child restraint, route the seat belt Follow the child restraint manufacturers
through the child restraint belt path and directions exactly when installing an infant 06086S0102NA
then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. or child restraint. Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Remind all children in the vehicle that the Locations
seat belts are not toys and that they
should not play with them. The seat belts in the passenger seating ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking
positions are equipped with a Switchable Retractor
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that
Warning! Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
is designed to keep the lap portion of the
seat belt tight around the child restraint
so that it is not necessary to use a locking
Improper installation of a child restraint
to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure
clip. The ALR retractor can be switched
of the restraint. The child could be badly into a locked mode by pulling all of the
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint webbing out of the retractor and then
manufacturers directions exactly when letting the webbing retract back into the
installing an infant or child restraint. retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make
122
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (childs weight + weight Always use the tether anchor when using the
of the child restraint) for using the Tether seat belt to install a forward facing child
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward restraint, up to the recommended weight limit
facing child restraint? of the child restraint.
Contact between the front passenger seat and
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
Yes the child restraint is allowed, if the child
back of the front passenger seat?
restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
Only the center head restraint (if equipped) can
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes
be removed.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating
seat belt against the belt path of the child No
position with an ALR retractor.
restraint?

Installing A Child Restraint With A 1. Place the child seat in the center of 4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap
Switchable Automatic Locking the seating position. For some second portion tight against the child seat.
row seats, you may need to recline the
Retractor (ALR): 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the
seat and/or raise the head restraint to
get a better fit. If the rear seat can be shoulder part of the belt until you have
Child restraint systems are designed to
moved forward and rearward in the pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the
be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its retractor. Then, allow the webbing to
the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
rear-most position to make room for the retract back into the retractor. As the
child seat. You may also move the front webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking
seat forward to allow more room for the sound. This means the seat belt is now in
Warning! the Automatic Locking mode.
child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the
Improper installation or failure to retractor. If it is locked, you should not be
properly secure a child restraint can lead to from the retractor to pass it through the
belt path of the child restraint. Do not able to pull out any webbing. If the
failure of the restraint. The child could be
badly injured or killed. twist the belt webbing in the belt path. retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
Follow the child restraint manufacturers 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
directions exactly when installing an infant until you hear a click.
or child restraint.

123
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing Installing Child Restraints Using
SAFETY

to tighten the lap portion around the child The Top Tether Anchorage:
restraint while you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into
the vehicle seat. Warning!
8. If the child restraint has a top tether
strap and the seating position has a top Do not attach a tether strap for a
tether anchorage, connect the tether rear-facing car seat to any location in front
strap to the anchorage and tighten the of the car seat, including the seat frame or a
tether strap. See the section Installing tether anchorage. Only attach the tether
Child Restraints Using the Top Tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether 06086S0104NA
Anchorage for directions to attach a anchorage that is approved for that seating Upper Tether Anchorage Location
position, located behind the top of the
tether anchor. 3. Route the tether strap to provide the
vehicle seat. See the section Lower Anchors
9. Test that the child restraint is and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint most direct path for the strap between
installed tightly by pulling back and forth System for the location of approved tether the anchor and the child seat. If your
anchorages in your vehicle. vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear
on the child seat at the belt path. It should
not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in head restraints, raise the head restraint,
any direction. and where possible, route the tether
strap under the head restraint and
Any seat belt system will loosen with between the two posts. If not possible,
time, so check the belt occasionally, and lower the head restraint and pass the
pull it tight if necessary. tether strap around the outboard side of
the head restraint.

1. Look behind the seating position 4. Attach the tether strap hook of the
where you plan to install the child child restraint to the top tether
restraint to find the tether anchorage. anchorage as shown in the diagram.
You may need to move the seat forward 5. Remove slack in the tether strap
to provide better access to the tether according to the child restraint
anchorage. If there is no top tether manufacturers instructions.
anchorage for that seating position,
move the child restraint to another
position in the vehicle if one is available.
2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the
anchor directly behind the seat where
you are placing the child restraint.
124
SAFETY TIPS If you are required to drive with the
Warning! Transporting Passengers trunk/liftgate/rear doors open, make sure
that all windows are closed and the climate
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN control BLOWER switch is set at high speed.
An incorrectly anchored tether strap THE CARGO AREA. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
could lead to increased head motion and If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle
possible injury to the child. Use only the with the engine running, adjust your heating
anchorage position directly behind the child Warning! or cooling controls to force outside air into
seat to secure a child restraint top tether the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat The best protection against carbon
seat, make sure the tether strap does not
slip into the opening between the seatbacks build-up may cause serious injury or death. monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a
as you remove slack in the strap. properly maintained engine exhaust
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
system.
cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In
a collision, people riding in these areas are Whenever a change is noticed in the
Transporting Pets
more likely to be seriously injured or killed. sound of the exhaust system, when
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be your vehicle that is not equipped with seats vehicle, or when the underside or rear of
thrown about and possibly injured, or and seat belts. the vehicle is damaged, have a competent
injure a passenger during panic braking or mechanic inspect the complete exhaust
in a collision. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a system and adjacent body areas for
seat and using a seat belt properly.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are mispositioned parts. Open seams or
secured by seat belts. Exhaust Gas loose connections could permit exhaust
fumes to seep into the passenger
compartment. In addition, inspect the
Warning! exhaust system each time the vehicle is
raised for lubrication or oil change.
Replace as required.
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
odorless. Breathing it can make you The Vehicle
unconscious and can eventually poison you.
To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety Seat Belts
tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
or in confined areas any longer than needed checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts.
to move your vehicle in or out of the area. Damaged parts must be replaced
125
immediately. Do not disassemble or your authorized dealer for service if your
SAFETY

ONLY install floor mats designed to fit


modify the system. defroster is inoperable. your vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that
Front seat belt assemblies must be cannot be properly attached and secured to
Floor Mat Safety Information your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be
replaced after a collision. Rear seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a Always use floor mats designed to fit replaced, only use a FCA approved floor mat
collision if they have been damaged (i.e., for the specific make, model, and year of
your vehicle. Only use a floor mat that your vehicle.
bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If does not interfere with the operation of
there is any question regarding seat belt the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. ONLY use the drivers side floor mat on
or retractor condition, replace the seat Only use a floor mat that is securely the drivers side floor area. To check for
belt. attached using the floor mat fasteners so interference, with the vehicle properly
parked with the engine off, fully depress the
it cannot slip out of position and interfere accelerator, the brake, and the clutch pedal
Air Bag Warning Light with the accelerator, brake or clutch (if present) to check for interference. If your
The Air Bag warning light will turn on pedals or impair safe operation of your floor mat interferes with the operation of
for four to eight seconds as a bulb check vehicle in other ways. any pedal, or is not secure to the floor,
when the ignition switch is first turned to remove the floor mat from the vehicle and
ON/RUN. If the light is either not on place the floor mat in your trunk.
during starting, stays on, or turns on while Warning! ONLY use the passengers side floor mat
driving, have the system inspected at on the passengers side floor area.
your authorized dealer as soon as ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
possible. After the bulb check, this light slide into the drivers side floor area when
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
will illuminate with a single chime when a fasteners may cause your floor mat to the vehicle is moving. Objects can become
fault with the Air Bag System has been interfere with the accelerator, brake, or trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
detected. It will stay on until the fault is clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
removed. If the light comes on control. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or control.
intermittently or remains on while DEATH: NEVER place any objects under the floor
driving, have your authorized dealer ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects
service the vehicle immediately. Refer to mat using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT could change the position of the floor mat
Occupant Restraint Systems in Safety install your floor mat upside down or turn and may cause interference with the
your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
for further information.
mat is secured using the floor mat fasteners
Defroster on a regular basis. If the vehicle carpet has been removed
and re-installed, always properly attach
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR carpet to the floor and check the floor mat
Check operation by selecting the defrost MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before
mode and place the blower control on fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet.
installing any other floor mat. NEVER install Fully depress each pedal to check for
high speed. You should be able to feel the or stack an additional floor mat on top of an interference with the accelerator, brake, or
air directed against the windshield. See existing floor mat. clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.

126
It is recommended to only use mild soap Fluid Leaks
and water to clean your floor mats. After
cleaning, always check your floor mat has
Check area under the vehicle after
been properly installed and is secured to overnight parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or
your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes
by lightly pulling mat. are detected or if fuel, or brake fluid
leaks are suspected. The cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should
Make Outside The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear
and uneven wear patterns. Check for
stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect
the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect
sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness.
Check the tires (including spare) for
proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of
brake lights and exterior lights while you
work the controls. Check turn signal and
high beam indicator lights on the
instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and
locking.

127
This page is intentionally left blank

128
STARTING AND OPERATING

Lets get to the core of the vehicle, and STARTING THE ENGINE . . . . . . . .130
see how you can explore its fullest ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE . . . . . . . .132
potential. Well look at how to drive AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION. . . . .135
safely in any situation, making it a ALFA DNA PRO SELECTOR . . . . . .140
welcome companion with our comfort ALFA ACTIVE SUSPENSION (AAS) . .143
and wallets in mind.
STOP/START SYSTEM . . . . . . . . .144
SPEED LIMITER . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
SPEED CONTROL
(CRUISE CONTROL) . . . . . . . . . .147
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
(ACC) IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .149
PARK SENSORS SYSTEM . . . . . . .156
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW)
SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . .158
REAR BACK-UP CAMERA / DYNAMIC
GRIDLINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
REFUELING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . .163
VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . .164
TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . .165
SUGGESTIONS FOR DRIVING. . . . .166

129
STARTING THE ENGINE Starting Procedure
STARTING AND OPERATING

If the vehicle has a discharged battery,


Before starting the engine, be sure to Proceed as follows: booster cables may be used to obtain a
adjust the seat, the interior rear view start from a booster battery or the battery
mirrors, and the door mirrors, and fasten 1. Apply the electric park brake and set in another vehicle. This type of start can be
the seat belt correctly. the gear selector to PARK (P) or dangerous if done improperly. Refer to
NEUTRAL (N). Jump Starting in In Case Of Emergency
Never press the accelerator pedal before for further information.
starting the engine. 2. Fully depress the brake pedal without
If necessary, messages indicating the touching the accelerator.
starting procedure can be shown in the Caution!
display. 3. Briefly push the ignition button.
4. If the engine doesn't start within a few
To prevent damage to the starter, do not
Warning! seconds, you need to repeat the
continuously crank the engine for more than
procedure. 25 seconds at a time. Wait 60 seconds
If the problem persists, contact an before trying again.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
authorized dealer.
the key fob from the vehicle and lock your
vehicle. Remote Starting System
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or This system uses the key fob to start the
Warning! engine conveniently from outside the
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
vehicle while still maintaining security.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle
unattended is dangerous for a number of Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid The system has a range of at least 300
reasons. A child or others could be seriously into the throttle body air inlet opening in an feet (91 meters).
or fatally injured. Children should be warned attempt to start the vehicle. This could The remote starting system also
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal result in flash fire causing serious personal activates the climate control (if
or the transmission gear selector. injury. equipped), the heated seats (if equipped),
Do not leave the key fob in or near the Do not attempt to push or tow your and the heated steering wheel (if
vehicle, or in a location accessible to vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped equipped), depending on temperatures
children. A child could operate power with an automatic transmission cannot be outside and inside of the vehicle.
windows, other controls, or move the started this way. Unburned fuel could enter
vehicle. the catalytic converter and once the engine Note:
has started, ignite and damage the Obstructions between the vehicle
Do not leave children or animals inside converter and vehicle.
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat and key fob may reduce this range.
build-up may cause serious injury or death.

130
How to use Remote Start Remote Start Windshield Wiper DeIcer If Engine Fails To Start
All of the following conditions must be Activation If Equipped
Starting the Engine with Key Fob
met before the engine will remote start: When remote start is active and the Battery Run Down or Drained
Gear selector in PARK (P). outside ambient temperature is less than
If the ignition does not respond when the
39F (4C), the Windshield Wiper De-Icer
Doors closed. button is pushed, the key fob battery
will be enabled. Exiting remote start will
Hood closed. might be run down or drained. Therefore,
resume previous operation, except if the
the system does not detect the presence
Trunk closed. Windshield Wiper De-Icer is active.
of the key fob in the vehicle, and will
Hazard switch off. The Windshield Wiper De-Icer timer and display a dedicated message.
operation will continue.
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not In this case, follow the instructions
pressed). Extended Park Starting outlined in "Starting With A Discharged
Battery at an acceptable charge level. Key Fob Battery" in the "Getting To Know
If the vehicle has not been started or
Your Vehicle" chapter, and start the
PANIC button not pushed. driven for at least 35 days, it is advisable
engine normally.
to follow the indications below.
System not disabled from previous
remote start event. To start the engine, proceed as follows:
1. Briefly push the ignition button Warning!
Vehicle alarm system indicator
flashing. 2. If the engine does not start, wait five
Ignition in the OFF mode. seconds and let the starter cool down and Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid
into the throttle body air inlet opening in an
Fuel level meets minimum then repeat the starting procedure
attempt to start the vehicle. This could
requirement. 3. If the engine does not start after eight result in flash fire causing serious personal
attempts, let the starter cool down for at injury.
Remote Start Comfort Systems If
least 10 seconds, and then repeat the Do not attempt to push or tow your
Equipped
starting procedure vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped
When Remote Start is activated, the with an automatic transmission cannot be
heated steering wheel and driver heated If the problem persists, contact your started this way. Unburned fuel could enter
seat features will automatically turn on in authorized dealer. the catalytic converter and once the engine
cold weather. Note: After prolonged vehicle inactivity, has started, ignite and damage the
very difficult starting, that can be noticed converter and vehicle.
These features will stay on through the
duration of remote start also until the through rapid fatigue of the starter, If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN mode. might also be due to a discharged booster cables may be used to obtain a
battery. In this case, see the "Jump start from a booster battery or the battery
Starting" section in the "In Case Of in another vehicle. This type of start can be
Emergency" chapter. dangerous if done improperly. Refer to
Jump Starting in In Case Of Emergency
for further information.
131
consecutively within a few seconds. The ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE
STARTING AND OPERATING

engine will shut down, and the ignition will The vehicle is equipped with electric park
Caution!
be placed in the ON mode brake to guarantee better use and
With the keyless ignition system, it is optimal performance compared to a
To prevent damage to the starter, do not
possible to go away from the vehicle manually operated park brake.
continuously crank the engine for more than
25 seconds at a time. Wait 60 seconds
taking the key fob with you, without the The electric parking brake features a
before trying again. engine switching off. The vehicle will switch located on the center console, a
inform about the absence of the key on motor with caliper for each rear wheel,
board, only if the doors are closed.
After Starting Warming Up The and an electronic control module.
Stopping the engine (cycling from the ON
Engine to the STOP position) the accessories are
Proceed as follows: still powered for about three minutes, or
until a door is opened.
Travel slowly, letting the engine run at
a reduced RPM, without accelerating When the ignition is in the STOP/OFF
mode, the window switches remain active
suddenly. for three minutes. Opening a front door
It is recommended to wait until the will cancel this function.
digital engine coolant temperature After severe driving, idle the engine to
indicator starts to rise for maximum allow the temperature inside the engine
performance. compartment to cool before shutting off
the engine. 07046S0001EM
Stopping The Engine Electric Park Brake Switch
Turbocharger Cool Down
To stop the engine, proceed as follows: It is recommended before switching the The electric parking brake can be
1. Park the vehicle in a position that is vehicle off, to keep the engine idling for a engaged in two ways:
not dangerous for oncoming traffic. few minutes so that the turbocharger can Manually, by pulling the switch on the
2. Engage the PARK (P) mode. be suitably lubricated. This procedure is center console.
particularly recommended after severe Automatically, in "Safe Hold" or "Auto
3. With engine idling, push the driving.
START/STOP button on the steering Park Brake" conditions.
After a full load operation, keep the
wheel to STOP the engine. engine idling for three to five minutes Note: Normally, the electric parking
Note: Do not leave the ignition in ON before switching it off. brake is engaged automatically when the
mode when the engine is off. This time allows the lubricating oil and engine is stopped. This function can be
To shut off the engine with vehicle speed the engine coolant to eliminate the deactivated/activated on the
greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), you must excessive heat from combustion Information and Entertainment system
push and hold the ignition or push the chamber, bearings, inner components and by selecting the following items in
START/STOP button three times turbocharger. sequence on the main menu: "Settings",
132
"Driver Assistance" and "Automatic Disengaging The Electric Park Brake
Parking Brake". Manually
Caution!
In addition to engaging the electric park In order to manually release the park
brake, along with steering and positioning brake, the ignition should be in the ON
chocks in front of the wheels (when on a With the Electronic Parking Brake failure mode. Press the brake pedal, and then
steep slope), you must always place the warning light on, some functions of the push the switch on the center console
vehicle in the PARK (P) mode before electric parking brake are deactivated. In briefly.
leaving. this case the driver is responsible for brake
activation and vehicle parking in complete Noise may be heard from the rear of the
Should the vehicle battery be faulty, the safety conditions. vehicle, and a slight movement of the
battery must be replaced in order to brake pedal may be detected during
unlock the electric park brake. disengagement.
If, under exceptional circumstances, the
Engaging The Park Brake Manually After disengaging the electric parking
use of the brake is required with the
brake, the BRAKE warning light on the
Briefly pull the switch located on the vehicle in motion, keep the switch on the
instrument panel and the light on the
center console to manually engage the center console pulled as long as the brake
switch will turn off.
electric park brake when the vehicle is action is necessary.
stationary. If the BRAKE warning light on the
The BRAKE warning light may turn on
instrument panel remains on with the
Noise may be heard from the rear of the with the hydraulic system temporarily
electric parking brake disengaged, this
vehicle when engaging the electric unavailable, in this case braking is
indicates a fault: in this case, contact an
parking brake. controlled by the motors.
authorized dealer.
A slight movement of the brake pedal The brake lights will also automatically
may be detected when engaging the turn on in the same way as for normal
electric parking brake with the brake braking with the use of the brake pedal. Warning!
pedal pressed. Release the switch on the center console
With the electric parking brake engaged, to stop the braking action with the
the BRAKE warning light on the vehicle in motion. Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
instrument panel and the switch will with access to an unlocked vehicle.
If, through this procedure, the vehicle is
illuminate. braked until a speed below 1.9 mph Allowing children to be in a vehicle
(3 km/h) is reached and the switch is kept unattended is dangerous for a number of
pulled, the park brake will definitively reasons. A child or others could be seriously
engage. or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the park brake, brake pedal or
Note: Driving the vehicle with the the gear selector.
electric parking brake engaged, or using
it several times to slow down the vehicle,
may cause severe damage to the braking
system.
133
"Drive Away Release": the electric park Safe Hold
STARTING AND OPERATING

Do not leave the key fob in or near the


vehicle or in a location accessible to brake will automatically disengage with Safe Hold is a safety function that
children. A child could operate power the driver side seat belt fastened and the automatically engages the electric park
windows, other controls, or move the detection of an action performed by the
vehicle.
brake in the event of a dangerous
driver to move the vehicle (forward gear condition for the vehicle.
Be sure the park brake is fully disengaged or reverse gear). This feature can be The electric park brake engages
before driving; failure to do so can lead to turned on or off in the Information and
brake failure and a collision.
automatically to prevent vehicle
Entertainment System. movement if:
Always fully apply the park brake when The vehicle speed is below 2 mph
leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause
"Safe Hold": if the vehicle speed is
damage or injury. lower than 1.9 mph (3 km/h), the gear (3 km/h).
selector is not in PARK (P) position and A transmission operating mode
the driver's intention of leaving the different from PARK (P) is activated.
Caution! vehicle is detected, the electric park The driver's seat belt is not fastened.
brake will automatically engage to hold
The driver side door is open.
the vehicle in safety conditions.
Never use gear position PARK (P) instead of No attempts to apply pressure on the
the electric parking brake. Always engage "Auto Park Brake": if the vehicle speed
brake pedal have been detected.
the electric parking brake when parking the is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h), the electric
vehicle to prevent injury or damage caused park brake will automatically engage The Safe Hold function can be
by the unexpected movement of the vehicle. temporarily disabled by pressing the
when the gear selector is in PARK (P)
position. The light on the switch located switch located on the center console and
Electric Park Brake Operating Modes the brake pedal at the same time, with
on the center console switches on
the vehicle stationary and the driver side
The electric park brake may operate as together with the BRAKE warning light on door open.
follows: the instrument panel when the park brake
Once disabled, the function will activate
"Dynamic Operating Mode": this mode is engaged and applied to the wheels. again when the vehicle speed reaches
is activated by pulling the switch Each automatic park brake engagement 12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition is cycled
repeatedly while driving. can be cancelled by pressing the switch to STOP and then to ON.
"Static Engagement and Release on the center console and at the same
Mode": with the vehicle stationary, the time moving the gear selector for the
electric park brake can be activated by transmission to position PARK (P).
pulling the switch on the center console
once. On the other hand, push the switch
and the brake pedal at the same time to
disengage the brake.
134
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION the transmission into PARK, and turn the Display
The vehicle can be equipped with an ignition STOP/OFF. When the ignition is in The following information is shown on the
electronically controlled 8-speed the STOP/OFF mode, the transmission is dedicated area of the display:
automatic transmission where gear locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against
unwanted movement. In Automatic Mode: the active mode
shifting automatically takes place,
(P, R, N, D) and with "D" the current gear
depending on the vehicle usage When leaving the vehicle, always make
instantaneous parameters (vehicle sure the ignition is in the STOP/OFF mode, number.
speed, grade, and accelerator pedal remove the key fob from the vehicle, and In Manual Drive Mode (Sequential):
position). lock the vehicle. the mode (M), the current gear and the
The new transmission is an absolute Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or double or single gear shift request, both
innovation, as it can match the with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing up and down (single or double arrow).
Stop/Start system with the traditional children to be in a vehicle unattended is
automatic transmissions with built-in dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally
torque converter. For further injured. Children should be warned not to
information, refer to the Stop/Start touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
section within this chapter. transmission gear selector.
Manual gear shifting can still occur Do not leave the key fob in or near the
thanks to the "sequential mode" position vehicle (or in a location accessible to children),
for the gear selector. and do not leave the ignition in the AVV or ON
mode. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Warning!
07076S0001EM

Caution! Gear Display


It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
Gear Selector
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing Damage to the transmission may occur if The gear functioning is controlled by the
the brake pedal, the vehicle could the following precautions are not observed: gear selector, which can assume the
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE following positions:
You could lose control of the vehicle and hit only after the vehicle has come to a
someone or something. Only shift into gear P = PARK
complete stop.
when the engine is idling normally and your R = REVERSE
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is N = NEUTRAL
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
above idle speed. D = DRIVE, (automatic forward speed)
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all
vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle Before shifting into any gear, make sure AutoStick: + manually shift to higher
while the engine is running. Before exiting a your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. gear; manually shift to lower gear
vehicle, always apply the park brake, shift
135
The positions diagram is illustrated on (D) or REVERSE (R), the vehicle must be
STARTING AND OPERATING

the top of the gear selector. moving at a low speed or stopped, and
the brake pedal must also be pressed.
Note:
DO NOT accelerate while shifting
from position PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
to another position.
After selecting a gear, wait a few
seconds before accelerating. This
07076S0005EM precaution is particularly important with
Gear Selector engine cold.
07076S0002EM 3 Gear Selector Button Transmission Operating Modes
Gear Selector Center Console
1 Gear Selector PARK (P)
The gear selector is a joystick style The transmission is locked in this mode.
2 PARK (P) Button shifting mechanism which returns to the The engine can be started in this mode.
center position automatically. It can be
pushed forward twice and rearward Note: Never try to engage PARK (P)
The letter corresponding to the mode mode when the vehicle is moving. Before
selected on the gear selector lights up twice, based on the starting condition.
leaving the vehicle, make sure this mode
and appears on the instrument cluster The PARK (P) mode can be is engaged (letter P shown on the display
display. enabled/disabled by pushing the PARK and gear selector) and that the park
To select a mode, move the gear selector (P) button. brake is engaged.
forward or backwards, together with To transition the vehicle into REVERSE When parking on a flat surface, first
pressing the brake pedal and button to (R) mode from DRIVE (D) mode, or into engage the PARK (P) mode and then
engage REVERSE (R). DRIVE (D) mode from REVERSE (R) engage the electric park brake.
mode, it is necessary to move the gear
selector by pushing the gear selector When parking uphill, before activating
button. the PARK (P) mode, engage the electric
park brake. Otherwise, it could be
When using AutoStick, activate it by difficult to engage the (P) mode.
moving the gear selector from DRIVE (D)
to the left and then forward toward the - To check that the PARK (P) mode is
symbol or backward toward the + symbol actually engaged, make sure (P) is
and the gear is changed. illuminated on the display and on the gear
selector.
To shift out of PARK (P), or to pass from
position NEUTRAL (N) to position DRIVE
136
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or NEUTRAL (N)
Warning! with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing Use this range when the vehicle is
children to be in a vehicle unattended is standing for prolonged periods with the
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child engine running. The engine may be
Never use the PARK position as a or others could be seriously or fatally started in this range. Apply the electric
substitute for the park brake. Always apply injured. Children should be warned not to park brake and shift the transmission
the park brake fully when parked to guard touch the park brake, brake pedal or the
transmission gear selector.
into PARK (P) if you must leave the
against vehicle movement and possible vehicle.
injury or damage. Do not leave the key fob in or near the
Your vehicle could move and injure you vehicle (or in a location accessible to
and others if it is not in PARK. Check by children), and do not leave the ignition in the
ON mode. A child could operate power
Warning!
trying to move the gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make windows, other controls, or move the
sure the transmission is in PARK before vehicle.
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off
leaving the vehicle. the ignition to coast down a hill. These are
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or unsafe practices that limit your response to
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than Caution! changing traffic or road conditions. You
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing might lose control of the vehicle and have a
the brake pedal, the vehicle could collision.
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. Before moving the transmission gear
You could lose control of the vehicle and hit selector out of PARK, you must push the
ignition button to cycle from STOP/OFF DRIVE (D)
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your mode to the ON mode, and also press the Use this mode in normal driving
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear conditions.
selector could result.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could Shifting from DRIVE (D) to PARK (P) or
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all DO NOT race the engine when shifting REVERSE (R) modes must take place
vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear only after releasing the accelerator
while the engine is running. Before exiting a range, as this can damage the drivetrain. pedal, with vehicle at a standstill and
vehicle, always apply the park brake, shift brake pedal pressed.
the transmission into PARK, and turn the This mode ensures automatic
ignition STOP/OFF. When the ignition is in
REVERSE (R)
the STOP/OFF mode, the transmission is Select this mode only with the vehicle at engagement of the most suitable gears
locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against a standstill. for driving needs and maximum fuel
unwanted movement. economy in terms of consumption.
When leaving the vehicle, always make
In this position, the transmission shifts
sure the ignition is in the STOP/OFF mode, the gears automatically, selecting the
remove the key fob from the vehicle, and most suitable for forward driving among
lock the vehicle. those available as you go. In this way the
137
vehicle's optimal driving characteristics Note:
STARTING AND OPERATING

are provided for all conditions. To select the correct gear for
AutoStick maximum deceleration (engine brake),
In the case of frequent shifting (e.g. for just keep the gear paddle pulled (): the
sport driving, when the vehicle is driven transmission goes to an operating mode
with a heavy load or on slopes), it is in which the vehicle can slow down
recommended to use the Autostick easily.
(sequential shifting) mode to select and The vehicle will keep the gear
keep a lower fixed ratio. selected by the driver until the safety
In these conditions, the use of a lower conditions allow it.
gear improves vehicle performance, 07076S0006EM

preventing overheating. Steering Wheel Shift Paddles This means, for example, that the
Note: If only one manual shift is system will try to prevent the engine
It is possible to shift from DRIVE (D)
mode to sequential mode regardless of necessary, the letter (D) will remain on from switching off, automatically
vehicle speed. the display with the engaged gear downshifting if the engine speed is too
next to it. low.
Activation
Starting from DRIVE (D), move the Deactivation Automatic Transmission Limp Home
selector to the left ( and + indication of To deactivate the sequential driving Mode
the trim) to activate the sequential drive mode, bring the gear selector back in
Transmission function is monitored
mode. The gear engaged will be shown on position DRIVE (D) ("automatic" driving
electronically for abnormal conditions. If
the display. mode).
a condition is detected that could result
Shifting is made by moving the gear in transmission damage, Transmission
selector forwards, towards symbol or Limp Home Mode is activated.
backwards, towards symbol +. Warning!
In this condition, the transmission stays
Steering Column Mounted Shift in fourth gear, regardless of the selected
Paddles Do not downshift for additional engine gear. Positions PARK (P), REVERSE (R)
The gear can also be manually shifted by braking on a slippery surface. The drive and NEUTRAL (N) still work.
using the paddles behind the steering wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle The symbol might light up in the
could skid, causing a collision or personal
wheel. Pull the right paddle (+) toward the instrument cluster.
injury.
steering wheel and release it to engage a
higher gear, and perform the same
operation with the left paddle (-) to
engage a lower gear.

138
Temporary failure This system prevents you from moving Select REVERSE (R) mode, or pass
In the event of a momentary problem, the the gear selector from position PARK (P) from REVERSE to another mode only
transmission can be reset to regain all unless the brakes are applied. with the vehicle at a standstill and engine
forward gears by performing the To shift the transmission out of PARK (P), idling.
following steps: the ignition must be cycled to the AVV Do not change between PARK (P),
mode (engine running or not) and the
1. Stop the vehicle. REVERSE (R), NEUTRAL (N) or DRIVE (D)
brake pedal must be pressed.
modes with engine running at a speed
2. Shift the transmission into PARK (P), Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock above idling.
if possible. If not, shift the transmission Disabling
to NEUTRAL (N). Before activating any transmission
Only if strictly necessary (e.g. pushing the operating mode, fully depress the brake
3. Push and hold the ignition until the vehicle, conveyor vehicle washing
pedal.
engine turns OFF. systems) inhibit the automatic activation
of PARK (P) mode when stopping the Note: The unexpected movement of the
4. Wait for about 10 seconds, then engine, or proceed as described below: vehicle can injure the occupants or
restart the engine. people nearby. Do not leave the vehicle
1. Vehicle at a standstill. with engine running: before getting out of
5. Shift into the desired gear range. If
the problem is no longer detected, the 2. NEUTRAL (N) mode activated. the passenger compartment always
transmission will return to normal engage the electric park brake, select the
3. Push the ignition button for at least PARK (P) mode, stop the engine.
operation.
three seconds.
Note: Even if the transmission can be
The automatic park brake engagement
reset, we recommend that you visit your Warning!
function when the engine is stopped can
authorized dealer at your earliest
also be deactivated on the Information
possible convenience. Your authorized
and Entertainment system by selecting
dealer has diagnostic equipment to It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
the following functions on the main menu:
determine if the problem could reoccur. If NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
"Settings", "Driver Assistance" and idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the transmission cannot be reset, service
"Automatic Parking Brake". the brake pedal, the vehicle could
is required at your authorized dealer.
Important Notes accelerate quickly forward or in reverse.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
System Failure to comply with what is reported someone or something. Only shift into gear
below may damage the transmission: when the engine is idling normally and your
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Transmission Shift Interlock system Shift into PARK (P) mode only with the
(BTSI) that holds the gear selector in vehicle at a standstill.
PARK (P) unless the brakes are applied.

139
ALFA DNA PRO SELECTOR
STARTING AND OPERATING

Unintended movement of a vehicle could


injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all Caution! Alfa DNA Pro System
vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a This vehicle is equipped with a Alfa DNA
vehicle, always apply the park brake, shift Only engage the gear with engine at idling Pro system selector (located on the
the transmission into PARK, and turn the while fully depressing the brake pedal. If the center console). There are four modes of
ignition STOP/OFF. When the ignition is in transmission temperature exceeds the operation to be selected according to
the STOP/OFF mode, the transmission is normal operating limits, the transmission
locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against
driving style and road conditions:
control unit may change the gear
unwanted movement. engagement order and reduce the drive
When leaving the vehicle, always make torque. If the transmission overheats, it
sure the ignition is in the STOP/OFF mode, could operate incorrectly until it cools down.
remove the key fob from the vehicle, and
When using the vehicle with extremely
lock the vehicle.
low external temperatures, the
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or transmission operation may change
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing depending on the engine and transmission
children to be in a vehicle unattended is temperature, as well as vehicle speed.
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child Activation of the torque converter clutch
or others could be seriously or fatally and of the eighth gear is inhibited until the
injured. Children should be warned not to transmission oil is correctly warmed up.
07076S0004EM
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the Complete operation of the transmission will
transmission gear selector. be enabled as soon as the fluid temperature Alfa DNA Pro System Selector
reaches the predefined value. d = Dynamic (sports driving mode).
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to n = Natural (mode for driving in normal
children), and do not leave the ignition in the conditions).
AVV or ON mode. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the a = Advanced Efficiency (ECO driving
vehicle. mode for maximum fuel savings).
RACE = track race driving mode.
= Adjusts the calibration of the
active suspension.
Unlike the other modes, the RACE
position does not latch; therefore, by
rotating the selector to RACE, it will
return to its initial position "d".
The symbol of the active mode lights up
in red on the selector.
140
On the instrument panel display, the
different modes are characterized by
different colors:
Natural - Blue
Dynamic - Red
Advanced Efficiency - Green
RACE - Yellow

07116S0002EM 07116S0003EM
Natural Mode Dynamic Mode
The "Performance" screen graphically ESC and ASR systems: intervention
reproduces some parameters closely thresholds that ensure more enjoyable,
linked to the efficiency of the driving sportier driving while guaranteeing the
style, with a view to limiting consumption. stability of the car.
Engine and transmission: adoption of
sports mapping.
07076S0003EM
Mode Display
Each driving mode is graphically different Warning!
in frame color and contents of each
individual "performance" screen.
In "Dynamic", the sensitivity of the
Driving Modes accelerator pedal increases considerably.
Consequently, driving is less fluid and
"Natural" Mode comfortable.
Natural Mode is characterized by 07116S0001EM
engine and transmission: standard Natural Mode Performance Display
response.
"Dynamic" Mode
Activation
Activation
It is activated by rotating the selector to
It is activated by rotating the selector to
the letter "n", the displays light up in blue.
the letter "d", the displays light up in red.

141
STARTING AND OPERATING

07116S0006EM 07116S0005EM 07116S0008EM


Dynamic Mode Performance Display Advanced Efficiency Mode Advanced Efficiency Mode Performance
The "Performance" screen displays Display
ESC and ASR systems: intervention
parameters related to vehicle stability, thresholds aimed at ensuring maximum RACE Mode
the graphs illustrate the trend of the safety in low-grip driving conditions. It is
longitudinal/lateral accelerations Activation
advisable to select "Advanced Efficiency"
(G-meter information), considering mode in the presence of low-grip road It is activated by rotating the selector to
gravity acceleration as a reference unit. surfaces. position "RACE", the displays light up in
yellow.
Lateral acceleration peaks are displayed Advanced Efficiency Mode is
on the right. characterized by reduced engine
performance and ECO shifting strategy
"Advanced Efficiency" Mode for the automatic transmission.
Activation The "Performance" screen graphically
It is activated by rotating the selector to displays some parameters closely
the letter "a", the displays light up in related to the vehicle consumption.
green.

07116S0004EM
RACE Mode
Engine and transmission: adoption of
sports mapping.

142
driving the vehicle normally without ALFA ACTIVE SUSPENSION
operating the brakes. (AAS)
Warning!
Driving Mode Deactivation The vehicle's electronic suspension
To deactivate any driving mode, simply management system is aimed at
It is recommended to activate this mode optimizing the vehicle's performance.
at the track. move the selector to any other mode.
The system continuously monitors the
In "RACE", the sensitivity of the Note: damping of the suspension through the
accelerator pedal increases considerably. When the engine is next started, the actuator installed on each shock
Consequently, driving is less fluid and "Advanced Efficiency", "Dynamic" and absorber. The calibration of the shock
comfortable.
"Natural" mode selected previously is absorbers can be adjusted to the
retained. The system will reactivate in conditions of the road surface and to the
The "Performance" screen displays "Advanced Efficiency", "Dynamic" or dynamic conditions of the vehicle,
parameters related to vehicle stability, "Natural" mode, depending on which improving its comfort and road handling.
the graphs illustrate the trend of the The driver can choose, even while driving,
mode was selected before the engine
longitudinal/lateral accelerations (only in "d" or "RACE" mode), between two
(G-meter information), considering was stopped.
types of suspension calibration: a more
gravity acceleration as a reference unit. When the engine is next started, the sporty ride or a more comfortable one.
The screen displays the lateral and "RACE" mode selected previously is not By pushing the button, the system will
longitudinal acceleration peaks. retained. The system will reactivate in work with the shock absorber calibration
"Dynamic" mode. which favors driving comfort.
It is not possible to go directly from
"Dynamic" mode to "Advanced
Efficiency" mode and vice versa. You
must always activate the Natural
mode first and then select the other
mode.

05036S0014EM
RACE Mode Performance Display 04306S0001EM

Note: If the brake system overheats, this Alfa Active Suspension Button
is communicated by the Information and If the system fails, the following symbol
Entertainment system. In this case, allow will appear in the instrument cluster
the system to cool for a few minutes by display .
143
STOP/START SYSTEM Restarting the Engine System Activation
STARTING AND OPERATING

Stop/Start System To restart the engine, release the brake The activation of the system is indicated
pedal. by the symbol lighting up on the
The Stop/Start system automatically With the brake pressed and the display. In this condition, the light on the
shuts off the engine during a vehicle stop transmission in automatic mode DRIVE button is off.
if the required conditions are met. (D), the engine will restart by shifting to
Releasing the brake pedal or accelerator System Deactivation
REVERSE (R), to PARK (P) or to
pedal will automatically restart the A message will appear on the display
"AutoStick".
engine. when the system is deactivated. In this
With brake pressed if the gear selector is condition, the light on the button is on.
The function was developed to increase in "AutoStick" mode, the engine will
vehicle efficiency by reducing fuel Note: Each time the engine is started,
restart by shifting to PARK (P) or by the system is activated regardless of
consumption, gas emissions, and sound moving the selector to + or -.
pollution. where was when it was previously
System Manual Activation/ switched off.
Operating Mode
Deactivation Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Stopping the Engine Autostop
To manually activate/deactivate the
With vehicle at a standstill and brake system, push the button located in the
pedal pressed, the engine switches off if For higher comfort and increased safety,
control panel on the left of the steering and to reduce emissions, there are
the gear selector is in a position other wheel.
than REVERSE (R). certain conditions where the engine will
not autostop despite the system being
The system does not operate when the active, such as:
gear selector is in REVERSE (R), in order
to making parking maneuvers easier. Engine still cold.
In the event of stops uphill, engine Especially cold outside temperature.
switching off is disabled to make the "Hill Battery not sufficiently charged.
Start Assist" function available (works Driver's door not shut.
only with running engine).
Driver's seat belt not fastened.
NOTE: The engine can only be
automatically stopped after having run at Reverse gear engaged (e.g. for parking
about 6 mph (10 km/h). After an maneuvers).
07126S0051EM
automatic restart, the vehicle only needs Stop/Start Button With the automatic climate control
to exceed a speed of 0.3 mph (0.5 km/h) active, an adequate cabin heating or
to stop the engine. cooling comfort has not been reached or
Engine stopping is signaled by the with MAX-DEF function active.
symbol lighting up on the instrument
cluster display.
144
During the first period of use, to Irregular Operation
initialize the system. In the event of malfunction, the
Steering angle beyond threshold. Stop/Start system is deactivated.
For failure indications, see the "Warning
Engine Restarting Conditions
Lights and Messages" paragraph,
Due to comfort, emission control and "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel"
safety reasons, the engine can restart chapter.
automatically without any action by the
Vehicle Inactivity
driver, under special conditions, such as:
Battery not sufficiently charged. In the event of vehicle inactivity (or if the
battery is replaced), special attention 07126S0002EM
Reduced braking system vacuum (e.g. Battery Power Supply
must be paid to the disconnection of the
if the brake pedal is pressed repeatedly). battery power supply. 1 Socket
Vehicle moving (e.g. when driving on Proceed as follows: 2 Sensor
roads with a grade). Remove connector from socket to 3 Connector
Engine stopping by the Stop/Start disconnect sensor (battery status
system for more than approx. three monitoring) installed on the negative pole
minutes. of the battery. This sensor should never Note: After setting the ignition to STOP
be disconnected from the pole except if and having closed the driver side door,
With the automatic climate control wait at least one minute before
the battery is replaced.
active, an adjustment in cabin heating or disconnecting the electrical supply from
cooling is made or with MAX-DEF the battery. When reconnecting the
function active. electrical supply to the battery, make
sure that the ignition is in the STOP mode
Safety Functions and the driver side door is closed.
When the engine is stopped through the
Stop/Start system, if the driver releases
their seat belt, opens the driver's or
passenger's door, or opens the hood from
inside the vehicle, the engine can be
restarted only by using the ignition.
This condition is indicated to the driver
both through a buzzer and a message on
the instrument cluster display.

145
SPEED LIMITER Programmed Speed Icon Flashing
STARTING AND OPERATING

Description The programmed speed will flash in the


following scenarios:
This feature allows the speed of the
vehicle to be limited to speeds, which can When the accelerator pedal has been
be set by the driver. fully pressed and the vehicle has
The maximum speed can be set with the exceeded the programmed speed.
vehicle stationary or in motion. The Activating the system after setting a
minimum speed that can be set is 18 mph limit below the effective speed of the
(30mk/h). vehicle.
When this feature is active, the vehicle 07136S0001EM
In the event of overtake acceleration.
speed depends on the pressing of the Speed Limiter Display
accelerator pedal until the programmed Deactivation
Speed Limit Programming
speed limit is reached (see "Speed Limit
Programming" paragraph). The speed limit can be programmed The feature can be activated/
through the Information and deactivated through the Information and
Activation Entertainment System.
Entertainment System.
The feature can be activated/ To access the function on the main menu, Deactivating The Device
deactivated through the Information and select the following items in sequence: To access this feature on the main menu,
Entertainment System. "Settings", "Safety" and "Speed Limiter select the following items in sequence:
Activating The Device Set Speed". "Settings", "Safety", Speed Limiter and
To access this feature on the main menu, By turning the Rotary Pad, the speed OFF.
select the following items in sequence: increases by 5 mph (5 km/h), from a
Automatic Deactivation Of The Device
"Settings", "Safety", Speed Limiter and minimum of 18 mph (30 km/h) to a
maximum of 112 mph (180 km/h). The device deactivates automatically in
ON. the event of fault in the system. In this
The activation of this feature is signaled Exceeding The Programmed Speed case, contact an authorized dealer.
by the displaying of the green symbol
By fully pressing the accelerator pedal, Temporary Signal Loss
along with the last speed set. The Speed
the programmed speed can be exceeded When the devices loses the signal, the
Limiter feature can remain active
even with the device active (e.g. in the white symbol without the speed
concurrently with the Speed Control
event of overtaking). indication illuminates on the display.
system. If a speed limit below the one
indicated in the Speed Control is The device is disabled until the speed
drops below the set limit, after which it System Failure
selected, the Speed Control speed will be
lowered to that of the Speed Limiter. This reactivates automatically. If there is a system failure, the amber
function remains available in RACE mode. symbol illuminates on the display.

146
SPEED CONTROL (CRUISE Limiter, the set speed will be lowered to
CONTROL) that of the Speed Limiter.
Warning!
This function remains available in RACE
Speed Control Description
mode.
This is an electronically controlled driving Speed Control can be dangerous where the Note: The system cannot be engaged in
assistance feature that allows the system cannot maintain a constant speed. FIRST or REVERSE gear. It is advisable to
desired vehicle speed to be maintained, Your vehicle could go too fast for the
engage it in THIRD gear or higher if using
without having to press the accelerator conditions, and you could lose control and
have an accident. Do not use Speed Control the Autostick feature.
pedal. This feature can be used at a speed
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding,
above 25 mph (40 km/h) on long icy, snow-covered or slippery.
stretches of dry, straight roads with few Warning!
variations (highways).
The speed control buttons are located on Activating
the left side of the steering wheel. To activate the Speed Control System, Leaving the Speed Control system on when
not in use is dangerous. You could
push the on/off button location on the
Note: accidentally set the system or cause it to go
left side of the steering wheel. faster than you want. You could lose control
To ensure correct operation, the and have an accident. Always leave the
speed control is designed to deactivate system OFF when you are not using it.
if more than one function is operated
simultaneously. In this case, the system
can be reactivated by pushing the on/off Setting The Desired Speed
button and setting the desired To set a desired speed, proceed as
speed. follows:
It is not recommended to use this 1. Turn the Speed Control on.
feature in city traffic.
2. When the vehicle has reached the
While driving downhill, the system could desired speed, push the SET switch up or
brake the vehicle to keep the set speed 07146S0001EM
down and release to activate. When the
the same. Speed Control On/Off Switch
accelerator is released, the vehicle will
The activation of the system is signaled maintain the selected speed
by the white warning light illuminating automatically.
on the instrument cluster.
The Speed Control function can remain
active at the same time as the Speed
Limiter System. If the set speed is higher
than the speed set with the Speed
147
Decreasing Speed Recalling The Speed
STARTING AND OPERATING

When the system is active, to reduce the Once the system has been deactivated,
speed, push the SET switch downward. but not canceled, the previously set
By keeping the switch pushed, the set speed can be recalled by pushing the RES
speed will decrease until the switch is button and removing your foot from the
released. The new speed will then be set. accelerator. The system will be set to the
At every movement of the SET switch, last stored speed.
the set speed can be adjusted. Note: Before resuming the previously
Note: Moving the SET switch allows to set speed, you must accelerate to a
adjust the speed according to the speed close to that speed.
07146S0002EM selected unit of measurement set on the
SET Switch Location Information and Entertainment System
If needed (when overtaking for instance), (see dedicated supplement).
you can accelerate beyond the set speed Accelerating When Overtaking
by pressing the accelerator. When you
Press the accelerator as you would
release the pedal, the vehicle will return
normally. When the pedal is released, the
to the previously set speed.
vehicle will return to the set speed.
When traveling downhill with the system
active, the vehicle speed may slightly Use Of The Feature On Hilly Routes
exceed the set one. The system can automatically downshift
Note: Before pushing the SET switch, the to keep the set speed when driving on 07146S0003EM
vehicle must be traveling at a constant hilly routes. Resume Button Location
speed on a flat surface. On steep grades, the loss or gain in speed
In Autostick (sequential) mode, before
may be considerable and is advisable to
Increasing/Decreasing Speed resuming the previously set speed, you
deactivate the Speed Control.
should accelerate until you are close to
Increasing Speed Note: The system keeps the speed set that speed. Then, push and release the
Once the Speed Control has been even uphill and downhill. A slight variation RES button.
activated, the speed can be increased by in the speed on slight rises is completely
pushing the SET switch upward. normal.
By keeping the switch pushed, the set
speed will increase until the switch is
released. The new speed will then be set.
At every movement of the SET switch,
the set speed can be adjusted.

148
Deactivating ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
Lightly pressing the brake pedal (ACC) IF EQUIPPED
deactivates the speed control without System Description
deleting the set speed.
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a
The speed control may also be
driver assist system that combines the
deactivated by applying the electric park
speed control functions with controlling
brake or when the braking system is
the distance from the vehicle ahead.
operated (e.g. operation of the ESC
system). The system allows to set and hold the
vehicle at the desired speed without
The set speed is deleted in the following
needing to press the accelerator. It also
cases: 06016S0004EM
allows to set and hold a distance from the Windshield Camera Location
Pushing the on/off button a second vehicle ahead (these settings are set by
time. the driver). This system enhances driving comfort
while on the highway or out of town with
The ignition is cycled to STOP. The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) uses a light traffic.
radar sensor located behind the front
If there is a malfunction with the bumper and a camera located in the If the sensor does not detect a vehicle
Speed Control. center/upper part of the windshield, to ahead, the system will maintain a fixed
detect the presence of a vehicle close set speed.
ahead. If the sensor detects a vehicle ahead, the
system automatically intervenes by
braking (or accelerating) slightly in order
not to exceed the original set speed, so
that the vehicle keeps the preset
distance, seeking to adapt to the speed
of the vehicle ahead.
Note: Adaptive Cruise Control
performance is not guaranteed under the
following circumstances, and it is
recommended to turn the system off
when:
06016S0003EM
Front Bumper Radar Location Driving in fog, heavy rain, or snow.
Driving in heavy traffic or
construction zones.

149
Driving on icy, snowy, slippery roads,
STARTING AND OPERATING

Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop


roads with steep climbs and descents, or while following a target vehicle and hold the
roads with numerous turns and bends. vehicle for approximately 3 minutes in the
stop position. If the target vehicle does not
Entering a turn lane. start moving within 3 minutes the parking
When circumstances do not allow brake will be activated, and the ACC system
safe driving at a constant speed. will be canceled.
You should switch off the ACC system:
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy
Warning! snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex
driving situations (i.e., in highway
construction zones). 07146S0010EM

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a


On/Off Button
When entering a turn lane or highway off
convenience system. It is not a substitute ramp; when driving on roads that are When the system is enabled and ready to
for active driving involvement. It is always winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or have operate, the display shows the white icon
the drivers responsibility to be attentive of steep uphill or downhill slopes. above dashes in place of the speed.
road, traffic, and weather conditions,
vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead; When circumstances do not allow safe
and, most importantly, brake operation to driving at a constant speed.
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under
all road conditions. Your complete attention
Activation/Deactivation
is always required while driving to maintain
safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow The system has four operating states:
these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury. Enabled (speed not set)
The ACC system: Activated (speed set)
Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming Paused
vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a
stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled Deactivated 07146S0016EM
Enabled Icons
vehicle).
Enabling/Activating
Cannot take street, traffic, and weather Setting a speed activates the system.
To enable the system, push and release The display shows the icon in green with
conditions into account, and may be limited
upon adverse sight distance conditions.
the button located on the left side on the set speed.
the steering wheel.
Does not always fully recognize complex Note: The system cannot be enabled
driving conditions, which can result in wrong when RACE mode is active.
or missing distance warnings.

150
When the ESC (or ABS or other
stability control systems) are operating
Warning!
or have just operated.
When the ESC system is off.
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
system on when not in use is dangerous. You When the Forward Collision Warning
could accidentally set the system or cause it system is braking automatically.
to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have a collision. Always leave In the event of system failure.
the system off when you are not using it. When the engine is OFF.
07146S0017EM In case of obstruction of the radar
Pausing/Deactivating SET Switch sensor (in this case the bumper area
With the feature enabled (speed not set), where it is located must be cleaned).
push the button to disable. While the accelerator pedal is pressed,
the system will not be able to control the If the system is set, the conditions
With the feature active (speed set), push described above also cause a
distance between the vehicle and the one
the button to pause. The display will cancellation or deactivation of the
ahead. In this case, the speed will be
show the icon in white with the speed in system. These situations may vary
determined only by the position of the
brackets. To deactivate the feature, push according to the conditions.
accelerator pedal.
the button a second time.
The system will return to normal Note: The system will not be deactivated
Setting The Desired Speed operation as soon as the accelerator when speeds higher than those set are
The speed can be set from a minimum of pedal is released. reached by pressing the accelerator
20 mph (30 km/h) to a maximum of The system cannot be set: pedal above 110 mph (180 km/h). In
110 mph (180 km/h). these situations, the system may not
When pressing the brake pedal. work correctly and it is recommended to
When the vehicle reaches the desired deactivate it.
speed, push the SET switch upward or When the brakes are overheated.
downward and release it to activate the When the electric park brake has been To Vary The Speed Setting
system. When the accelerator is released, operated. Increasing Speed
the vehicle will maintain the set speed
automatically. When either PARK (P), REVERSE (R) or Once the system has been activated, you
NEUTRAL (N) is engaged. can increase the speed by pushing the
SET switch upward. Each time the switch
When the engine rpm is above a is pushed, the speed increases by 1 mph.
maximum threshold.
By pushing and holding the switch
When the vehicle speed is not within upward, the set speed will increase in
the operational speed range. increments of 5 mph until the switch is
released. Then, the new speed will be set.
151
Decreasing Speed downhill; however a slight variation is The system will be set to the last stored
STARTING AND OPERATING

Once the system has been activated, you entirely normal, particularly on slight speed.
can decrease the speed by pushing the inclines.
SET switch downward. Each time the The transmission could shift to a
switch is pushed, the speed decreases by lower gear when driving downhill, or
1 mph. when accelerating. This is normal and
By pushing and holding the switch necessary to maintain the set speed
downward, the set speed will decrease in
increments of 5 mph until the switch is The system will disable while driving
released. Then, the new speed will be set. if the brakes overheat.

Note: Accelerating When Overtaking


Moving the SET switch allows you to When driving with ACC activated and
07146S0018EM
adjust the speed according to the following a vehicle, the system will
RES (Resume) Button
selected unit of measurement ("US" or provide an additional acceleration up to
"Metric") set on the Information and the ACC set speed to assist in passing the Before returning to the previously set
Entertainment System (see dedicated vehicle. This additional acceleration is speed, bring the speed close to that
supplement). triggered when the driver utilizes the left value, then push the RES button and
turn signal and will only be active when release it.
When the unit of measurement is set passing on the left hand side.
to Metric, pushing and holding the SET The system detects the direction of
switch will adjust the speed in 10 km/h Warning!
traffic automatically when the vehicle
increments. passes from left-hand traffic to
By keeping the accelerator pedal right-hand traffic. In this case, the The Resume function should only be used if
depressed, the vehicle can continue to overtaking assist function is only active traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming
accelerate beyond the set speed. In this when the reference vehicle is overtaken a set speed that is too high or too low for
case, use the SET switch to set the on the right. The additional acceleration prevailing traffic and road conditions could
is deactivated when the driver uses the cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate
speed to the vehicles current speed. too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
right direction indicator and returns to follow these warnings can result in a collision
When you push the SET button to the original lane.
reduce the speed, the braking system and death or serious personal injury.
intervenes automatically if the engine Resuming The Speed
brake does not slow the vehicle down Once the system has been canceled but Setting The Distance Between Vehicles
sufficiently to reach the set speed. The not deactivated, to resume a previously
device holds the set speed uphill and The distance between your vehicle and
set speed, simply push the RES button the vehicle ahead may be set to one bar
and remove your foot from the (short), two bars (medium), three bars
accelerator to recall it. (long), or four bars (maximum).
152
Warning!

The maximum breaking applied by the


system is limited. The driver may apply the
brakes in all cases if needed.
If the system predicts that the braking
level is insufficient to hold the set distance,
either BRAKE! or a dedicated message is
displayed to warn the driver of approaching
07146S0019EM 07146S0015EM
the vehicle ahead. An acoustic signal is also
Distance Icons Distance Button emitted. In this case, it is advised to brake
The distances from the vehicle ahead are The set speed is held if there are no immediately as necessary to hold a safe
proportional to speed. vehicles ahead. Once the shortest distance from the vehicle ahead.
The interval of time with relation to the distance has been selected, the next push The driver is responsible for ensuring that
vehicle ahead remains constant and of the button will set the maximum there are no pedestrians, other vehicles or
varies from one second (for the short distance. objectives along the direction of the vehicle.
Failure to comply with these precautions
distance one-bar setting) to two seconds If a slower vehicle is detected in the same may cause serious accidents and injuries.
(for the maximum distance four-bar lane, the vehicle icon on the display
setting). illuminates from grey to white. The The driver is fully responsible for holding
system automatically adjusts the a safe distance from the vehicle ahead
The set distance is shown on the display respecting the highway code in force in the
by a dedicated icon. vehicles speed to keep the set distance,
respective country.
The setting is four (maximum) the first independently of the set speed.
time the system is used. After the The vehicle holds the set distance until:
distance has been modified by the driver, Stop And Go Function
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a
the new distance will be stored also after speed higher than the set speed. The Stop and Go operating strategy
the system is deactivated and allows you to maintain a safe distance
reactivated. The vehicle ahead leaves the lane or from the vehicle ahead until the vehicle
the detection field of the Adaptive Cruise has completely stopped. It will also
To Decrease The Distance Control system sensor. restart the vehicle automatically if the
Push and release the distance button to vehicle ahead drives away within two
decrease the distance setting. The The distance setting is changed.
seconds, otherwise it is necessary to
distance setting decreases by one bar The Adaptive Cruise Control system is press the accelerator pedal or push the
(shorter) every time the button is pushed. deactivated/paused. RES button to restart.

153
This could be due to an obstruction of the Steering And Curves
STARTING AND OPERATING

vehicles sensor or camera. It could also Driving on curves with the system set
Warning!
be due to a fault in the system. If an could limit speed and acceleration to
obstruction is detected, clean the area of guarantee vehicle stability, even if no
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver the windshield opposite the interior rear vehicles are detected ahead.
must ensure that there are no pedestrians, view mirror, where the camera is located, When leaving the curve, the system
vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle. as well as the area of the front bumper resets the previously set speed.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in where the sensor is located. Then check
a collision and death or serious personal that the message has disappeared.
injury.
When the conditions limiting the system
functions end, normal operation will
Deactivation resume.
The system is deactivated and the set Should the fault persist, contact an
speed is canceled if: authorized dealer.
The button on the Adaptive Cruise Precautions While Driving
Control is pushed (with the system The system may not work correctly in
enabled or paused). some driving conditions (see below). The
The ignition is cycled to STOP. driver must control the vehicle at all 07146S0011EM

times. Steering And Curves


RACE mode is activated.
Vehicle Not Aligned Note:
The system is canceled (the set speed
and distance are stored): The system may not detect a vehicle In cases of narrow curves, the
traveling in the same lane, in the same performance of the system could be
When the system is paused (refer to direction, but is not aligned. It also may limited. In this case, it is advisable to
the Activation / Deactivation section). not detect a vehicle which is cutting in deactivate the system.
When the conditions shown in the from a side lane. Sufficient distance from
The system only limits the speed
Setting The Desired Speed section the vehicles ahead may not be
DURING a bend and not BEFORE it.
occur. guaranteed in these cases.
The non-aligned vehicle can weave in and Using The System On Slopes
Limited Operation Warning out of the driving lane causing the vehicle When driving on roads with a variable
If the dedicated message is shown on the to brake or accelerate unexpectedly. incline, the system may not detect the
display, a condition limiting the Adaptive presence of a vehicle in the lane. System
Cruise Control operation may have performance could be limited according
occurred. to speed, load, traffic conditions and
steep slopes.

154
Lane Change
The system may not detect the presence
of a vehicle until it is fully in your lane.

07146S0013EM 07146S0014EM
Small Vehicles Objects And Vehicles Moving In
Opposite Or Crosswise Direction
Sufficient distance from the vehicles
07146S0012EM ahead may not be guaranteed in these General Information
Lane Change cases.
This vehicle has systems that operate on
In this case, sufficient distance from the Stationary Objects And Vehicles radio frequency that comply with Part
vehicle which is changing lanes may not The system cannot detect the presence 15 of the Federal Communications
be guaranteed. It is advisable to pay the of stationary vehicles or objects. For Commission (FCC) rules and with
utmost attention at all times and be example, the system will not operate if Industry Canada Standards RSS-
always ready to apply the brakes if the vehicle ahead leaves the lane and a GEN/210/220/310.
needed. vehicle ahead of that one is stationary in Operation is subject to the following two
Small Vehicles that lane. Pay the utmost attention at all conditions:
Some narrow vehicles (e.g. bicycles and times and be always ready to apply the
brakes if needed. 1. The device may not cause harmful
motorcycles) traveling near the outer interference.
edges of the lane or which enter the lane Objects And Vehicles Moving In
from curb side are not detected until they Opposite Or Crosswise Direction 2. The device must accept any
are fully in the lane. interference received, including
The system cannot detect the presence
interference that may cause undesired
of objects or vehicles traveling in
operation of the device.
opposite or crosswise directions and
consequently will not activate. Changes or modifications to any of these
systems by other than an authorized
service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.

155
PARK SENSORS SYSTEM Engagement/Disengagement System Activation/Deactivation
STARTING AND OPERATING

Vehicles With Front And Rear Sensors To turn the system off, push the Park When the REVERSE gear is engaged and
Sensors System switch located to the the system is on, the front and rear
The parking sensors, located in the front left of the headlight switch. The indicator sensors are activated. If the vehicle
and rear bumpers, detect the presence of light within the switch will illuminate moves from REVERSE to a forward gear,
any obstacles and warn the driver when the system is turned off. Pushing the rear sensors are deactivated, while
through an acoustic signal and visual the switch a second time will turn the the front sensors remain active until the
indications will be displayed on the system back on, and the indicator light speed of 9 mph (15 km/h) is exceeded.
instrument cluster. will turn off. Note: In certain operating conditions, the
system could start detecting an obstacle
only after the vehicle has moved slightly
(a few inches).
Acoustic Signal
In the presence of an obstacle at the
front or the rear of the vehicle, an
acoustic signal with variable frequency
will sound:
The acoustic signal increases in
07176S0003EM
07176S0052EM
frequency as the distance between the
Front Sensor Location Park Sensors System On/Off Switch vehicle and the obstacle decreases.

The indicator light within the Park The acoustic signal becomes
Sensors System switch will also be on in continuous when the distance between
case of system failure. If the switch is the vehicle and the obstacle is less than
pushed with a system failure, the 11 inches (30 cm), and stops if the
indicator light will flash for distance increases.
approximately five seconds. The light will The acoustic signal is constant if the
then stay on constantly. distance between the vehicle and the
Note: When the ignition is cycled to ON, obstacle is unchanged.
the Park Sensors system keeps the last Note: If the sensors detect several front
state when the engine was stopped and rear obstacles, the closest obstacle
07176S0001EM (activated or deactivated) in its memory. is considered. An intermittent signal will
Rear Sensor Location
sound if the obstacles are at the same
distance (front and rear).

156
When the system emits an acoustic If several obstacles are detected Audio System Not Available: If the
signal, the volume of the Information and simultaneously in the front and rear area, display shows a message that the audio
Entertainment System, if activated, is the display will show all of them, system is not available, it means that the
automatically lowered. regardless of the area in which they were acoustic signal will be emitted by the
detected. instrument panel, and not through the
Indication On Display
In general, the vehicle is closer to the vehicles speakers.
The driver can select the type of warning
obstacle when a single or several flashing Note: Some conditions may influence
they would like to be displayed through
arcs are shown on the display and the the performance of the Park Sensors
the Information and Entertainment
acoustic signal becomes continuous. System:
System. To access the function on the
main menu, select in the following order: It is not possible to exit from the display
Reduced sensor sensitivity could be
screen while the vehicle is in REVERSE.
1. Settings. due to the presence of ice, snow, mud, or
Fault Indication thick paint on the surface of the sensor.
2. Driver Assistance. Parking sensor faults, if any, will be The sensors may detect a false
3. ParkSense. indicated by a message on the display on obstacle (echo interference) due to
the instrument cluster. Refer to "Warning mechanical interference, for example
4. Mode. Lights And Messages" in "Getting To when washing the vehicle or in extreme
Know Your Instrument Panel" for further weather.
5. Sound-Display. information.
Visual Indications The signals sent by the sensors can
Messages On The Display be altered by the presence of ultrasonic
The system indicates the presence of an
In case of system failure, a dedicated systems (e.g. pneumatic brake systems
obstacle by displaying a single red arc in
message appears on the instrument of trucks or pneumatic drills) near the
the detected areas, in relation to the
cluster for about five seconds. vehicle.
distance of the object and the position of
the vehicle. Cleaning The Front Or Rear Sensors: System performance can be
If the obstacle is detected in the front or If the display shows a message requiring influenced by the position of the
rear central area, a single red arc will be the sensors to be cleaned, make sure that sensors. For example, due to a change in
displayed as the obstacle approaches, the outer surface and the underside of the ride setting (caused by wear to the
first constant, then flashing, in addition the front and rear bumpers are free of shock absorbers or suspension), by
to an acoustic signal. debris (e.g. snow, mud, ice, etc.). Once changing tires, overloading the vehicle or
If the obstacle is detected in the front or these areas are clear, cycle the ignition to operations that require the vehicle to be
rear left and/or right area, a single red STOP. Then, return it to ON mode. If the lowered.
flashing arc will be shown in the message is still displayed, contact you
authorized dealer. Be sure not to place bumper stickers
corresponding area on the display and or other adhesives over the sensors as
the system will emit an acoustic signal, this will affect system performance.
either at frequent intervals or constantly.
157
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING
STARTING AND OPERATING

Warning! (LDW) SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Caution!


Description
Drivers must be careful when backing up The Lane Departure Warning system uses Do not tamper with nor operate on the
even when using the Parking Sensor system. a forward looking camera located on the camera. Do not close the openings in the
Always check carefully behind your vehicle, windshield to detect lane markings and aesthetic cover located under the interior
and be sure to check for pedestrians, measure vehicle position within the lane rear view mirror. In the event of a failure of
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or the camera, contact your authorized dealer.
boundaries.
blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your When one or both lane limits are The camera may have limited or absent
surroundings and must continue to pay detected and the vehicle passes over one operation due to weather conditions such
attention while backing up. Failure to do so without an activated turn signal, the as: heavy rain, hail, thick fog, heavy snow,
can result in serious injury or death. system emits a visual as well as an formation of ice layers on the windshield.
audible signal. Camera operation may also be
If the vehicle continues to go beyond the compromised by the presence of dust,
Caution! line of the lane without any intervention condensation, dirt or ice on the windshield,
from the driver, the surpassed line will by traffic conditions (e.g. vehicles that are
driving not aligned with yours, vehicle
light up on the display (left or right) to
The Parking Sensor system is only a driving in a transverse or opposite way on
parking aid and it is unable to recognize urge the driver to bring the vehicle back the same lane, bend with a small radius of
every obstacle, including small obstacles. into the limits of the lane. curvature), by road surface conditions and
Parking curbs might be temporarily by driving conditions (e.g. off-road driving).
detected or not detected at all. Obstacles Make sure the windshield is always clean.
located above or below the sensors will not Use specific detergents and clean cloths to
be detected when they are in close avoid scratching the windshield. The camera
proximity operation may also be limited or absent in
some driving, traffic and road surface
The vehicle must be driven slowly when conditions.
using the Parking Sensor system in order to
be able to stop in time when an obstacle is If the windshield must be replaced due to
detected. It is recommended that the driver scratches, chipping or breakage, contact
looks over his/her shoulder when using the exclusively your authorized dealer. Do not
Parking Sensor system. replace the windshield on your own. It is
advisable to replace the windshield if it is
damaged in the area of the camera.

158
System Activation/Deactivation A suitable distance is kept from the
vehicle in front.
The system is activated/deactivated by
pushing the button located on the end of The turn signal is not active.
the multifunction lever.
Symbols And Messages On The Display
The Lane Departure Warning system
advises the driver when the vehicle
leaves the driving lane by showing
symbols and messages on the instrument
cluster display.
07226S0007EM
Lane Limits Not Detected
Exiting A Lane With Detection Of A
Single Limit
07226S0001EM When the system is active and only, for
Lane Departure Warning System example, the left lane limit has been
Activation/Deactivation Button detected, the detected lane illuminates in
white on the display; the system is ready
Note: When the engine is started, the to provide visual warnings on the display
system maintains the operating mode in the event of unintentional exiting of
that was selected when it was turned the lane (turn signal not activated) to the
OFF. 07226S0002EM
left.
Vehicle Changing Lanes
Activation Conditions
When the system is active and the lane
Once turned on, the system becomes
limits have not been detected, the display
active only if the following conditions are
shows a grey vehicle icon with two grey
met:
lines.
The vehicle speed is above 37 mph
(60 km/h).
The lane limit lines are visible at least
on one side.
There are suitable visibility conditions.
07226S0003EM
The road is straight or with wide radius Left Lane Limit Detected
bends.

159
When the system detects that the vehicle If a line is crossed, the driver is alerted by
STARTING AND OPERATING

has approached the lane line and is about an audible signal as well as the visual
to pass it, the left line on the display indication in the instrument cluster. The
illuminates in yellow. signal is emitted through the speakers on
the side of the lane limit which is being
crossed (eg. if the vehicle is exceeding
the left line of the lane, the audible signal
will come from the speakers on the left of
the vehicle).
Changing The System Settings
07226S0005EM The system's sensitivity can be set
Both Lane Limits Detected through the Information and
When lane limits are detected, the Entertainment System. Sensitivity High
system is ready to provide indications in or Low can be selected.
07226S0004EM case the driver unintentionally leaves the To access the function, from the main
Left Lane Limit Approached lane (turn signal not activated). menu select the following in order:
The system operates in the same way, As the Lane Departure Warning system 1. Settings.
but mirrored, in the event of exiting the detects the lane limits while the vehicle is
right lane when only the right lane limit in motion, it will adjust the display 2. Safety.
has been detected. accordingly (from white to yellow and
3. Lane Departure Warning.
vice versa, and increase their thickness).
Exiting A Lane With Detection Of Both
Limits 4. Sensitivity.
When the system is active, both lane lines
on the display illuminate in white to
indicate the successful detection of both
limits.

07226S0006EM
Right Lane Limit Approached

160
Limited Operation Warning REAR BACK-UP CAMERA /
If a message appears on the display, a DYNAMIC GRIDLINES
condition limiting the Lane Departure
Description
Warning system operation may have
occurred. This could be an obstruction of The Rear Back-Up Camera is located just
the camera view, or a fault in the system. under the vehicles trunk lid, above the
If an obstruction is detected, clean the rear license plate.
area of the windshield by the interior rear
view mirror.
Although the vehicle can still be driven in
normal conditions, the system may not 07186S000218
function properly. Rear Back-Up Camera Display
When the conditions limiting the system Rear Back-Up Camera Features
are corrected, it will go back to normal To activate the Rear Back-Up Camera
operation. Should a fault persist, contact features, select Settings from the Main
your authorized dealer. Menu of the Information and
System Failure Warning Entertainment System.
07186S0001EM
If the system turns off and the warning Under Driver Assistance the following
Rear Back-Up Camera Location
light appears on the display, it means features can be selected:
that there is a system fault. When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
View
In this case, it is still possible to drive the Information and Entertainment System
vehicle, but you are advised to contact display will show the area behind the Camera Delay
your authorized dealer as soon as vehicle, as seen by the Rear Back-Up
Camera Guidelines
possible. Camera, along with a warning message.

161
Selecting View will activate the camera The table below shows the approximate
STARTING AND OPERATING

To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must


view on the display. be driven slowly when using the Rear distances for each area:
Selecting Camera Delay will allow the Back-Up Camera to be able to stop in time
camera view to remain on the display when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended
Distance from the
shortly after the vehicle is no longer in that the driver look frequently over his/her Area
shoulder when using the Rear Back-Up rear of the vehicle
REVERSE, followed by the previously
active screen. Camera. 011.8 inches
Red
(030 cm)
Selecting Camera Guidelines will
activate the display of the dynamic Symbols And Messages On The Display 11.8 inches to 3.3 feet
Yellow
guidelines that indicate the route of the Indications On The Display (30 cm1 m)
vehicle while in REVERSE.
Through the Information and 3.3 feet or more
Green
Entertainment System settings, by (1 m or more)
activating the "Camera Guidelines"
Warning! Messages On The Display
feature, guidelines can be seen on the
rear camera display. If activated, the If the trunk lid is lifted, the camera will
Drivers must be careful when backing up guidelines are positioned on the image to not detect any obstacle behind the
even when using the Rear Back-Up Camera. highlight the width of the vehicle and the vehicle. The display will show a dedicated
Always check carefully behind your vehicle, expected reverse path based on the warning message.
and be sure to check for pedestrians, steering wheel position. Make sure the trunk lid is closed by
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or pushing next to the lock until it clicks.
A superimposed central line indicates the
blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your center of the vehicle to assist in rear Important Notes
surroundings and must continue to pay parking maneuvers. The various colored
attention while backing up. Failure to do so areas indicate the distance from the rear Ice, snow or mud on the surface of the
can result in serious injury or death. of the vehicle. camera may reduce its sensitivity. It is
important to keep the camera surface
clean, and free from debris.
Caution! When parking, be aware of obstacles
that may be above or under the camera
range.
To avoid vehicle damage, Rear Back-Up
Camera should only be used as a parking
aid. The Rear Back-Up Camera is unable to
view every obstacle or object in your drive
path.

162
REFUELING THE VEHICLE Opening The Fuel Filler Door
Refueling The Vehicle To refuel proceed as follows:

Before refueling, make sure that the fuel 1. Open fuel filler door by pressing on
type is correct. the point shown by the arrow.
Also, stop the engine before refueling.
Note: An inefficient catalytic converter
leads to harmful exhaust emissions, thus
contributing to air pollution.

07206S0002EM
Caution!
Fuel Door Label
Emergency Fuel Door Opening
Never introduce leaded fuel to the tank,
even in small amounts in an emergency, as In the event of an emergency the fuel
this would damage the catalytic converter 07206S0001EM
filler door can be opened by operating
beyond repair. Fuel Door from inside the trunk.
Proceed as follows:
2. Remove the fuel filler cap.
Refueling Capacity 1. Open the trunk and locate the
3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the emergency fuel filler release cap on the
To ensure that you fill the tank filler pipe.
completely, top off twice after the first inside lining.
click of the fuel nozzle. 4. When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts 2. Open the cap, and pull the cord inside
Further top-off could cause faults in the off, before removing the nozzle, wait for to unlock the fuel filler door.
fuel feeding system. at least 10 seconds in order for the fuel
to flow inside the tank. 3. Open the fuel filler door by pressing
Refueling Procedure on it (see the previous instructions).
The fuel filler door is unlocked when the 5. Remove the fuel filler nozzle, tighten
central door locking system is unlocked. the gas cap about turn until you hear
It is automatically locked when the one click. This is an indication that cap is
central locking system is applied. properly tightened.
The label indicates the fuel type
(UNLEADED FUEL = gasoline).

163
VEHICLE LOADING Payload
STARTING AND OPERATING

Warning! Certification Label The payload of a vehicle is defined as the


As required by National Highway Traffic allowable load weight a truck can carry,
Safety Administration regulations, your including the weight of the driver, all
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open vehicle has a certification label affixed to passengers, options and cargo.
or the tank is being filled. the driver's side door or pillar. Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This label contains the month and year of
This is in violation of most state and federal manufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight The GAWR is the maximum permissible
fire regulations and may cause the MIL to Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating load on the front and rear axles. The load
turn on. (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle must be distributed in the cargo area so
Identification Number (VIN). A that the GAWR of each axle is not
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped
into a portable container that is inside of a Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is exceeded.
vehicle. You could be burned. Always place included on this label and indicates the Each axle GAWR is determined by the
gas containers on the ground while filling. Month, Day and Hour of manufacture. The components in the system with the
bar code that appears on the bottom of lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
Note: If the filler compartment is the label is your VIN. springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or
washed with a pressure washer, keep it at suspension components sometimes
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating specified by purchasers for increased
a distance of at least 8 inches (20 cm).
(GVWR) durability does not necessarily increase
the vehicle's GVWR.
The GVWR is the total permissible
weight of your vehicle including driver, Tire Size
passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum The tire size on the Vehicle Certification
capacities of front and rear axle systems Label represents the actual tire size on
(GAWR). Total load must be limited so your vehicle. Replacement tires must be
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
exceeded.

164
Rim Size axles has been exceeded but the total TRAILER TOWING
load is within the specified GVWR. If so, Trailer towing is not recommended for
This is the rim size that is appropriate for weight must be shifted from front to rear
the tire size listed. this vehicle.
or rear to front as appropriate until the
Inflation Pressure specified weight limitations are met.
Store the heavier items down low and be
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for sure that the weight is distributed
your vehicle for all loading conditions up equally. Stow all loose items securely
to full GAWR. before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have
Curb Weight
an adverse effect on the way your vehicle
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as steers and handles and the way the
the total weight of the vehicle with all brakes operate.
fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no Caution!
occupants or cargo loaded into the
vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
vehicle on a commercial scale before any GVWR or the maximum front and rear
occupants or cargo are added. GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
break, or it can change the way your vehicle
Loading handles. This could cause you to lose control.
Also overloading can shorten the life of your
The actual total weight and the weight of vehicle.
the front and rear of your vehicle at the
ground can best be determined by
weighing it when it is loaded and ready
for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed
on a commercial scale to insure that the
GVWR has not been exceeded. The
weight on the front and rear of the
vehicle should then be determined
separately to be sure that the load is
properly distributed over the front and
rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may show
that the GAWR of either the front or rear
165
SUGGESTIONS FOR DRIVING Climate Control System Max. Speed
STARTING AND OPERATING

Saving Fuel Using the climate control system will Fuel consumption considerably increases
increase consumption: use standard as speed increases. Maintain a constant
Below are some suggestions which may ventilation when the temperature speed, avoiding unnecessary braking and
help you save fuel and lower the amount outside permits. acceleration, which cost in terms of both
of harmful emissions released into the fuel consumption and emissions.
atmosphere. Devices for Aerodynamic Control
The use of non-certified devices for Acceleration
Vehicle Maintenance
aerodynamic control may adversely Accelerating violently severely affects
Checks and operations should be carried affect air drag and consumption levels. consumption and emissions: acceleration
out in accordance with the Maintenance should be gradual and should not exceed
Plan. Refer to "Scheduled Servicing" in Driving Style
the maximum torque.
"Servicing And Maintenance" for further Starting
information. Conditions Of Use
Do not warm up the engine at low or high
Tires revs when the vehicle is stationary; this Cold Starting
Check the tire pressures at least once causes the engine to warm up more Short trips and frequent cold starts will
every four weeks: if the pressure is too slowly, thereby increasing fuel not allow the engine to reach optimum
low, consumption levels increase as consumption and emissions. It is operating temperature. This results in a
resistance to rolling is higher. therefore advisable to drive off significant increase in consumption
immediately, slowly, avoiding high levels (from +15 to +30% in city driving)
Unnecessary Loads speeds: by doing this the engine will and emissions.
Do not travel with an overloaded trunk. warm up more quickly.
The weight of the vehicle and its Traffic And Road Conditions
arrangement greatly affect fuel Unnecessary Actions High fuel consumption is caused by heavy
consumption and stability. Avoid revving up when starting at traffic traffic, for instance when travelling in
lights or before stopping the engine. This traffic with frequent use of low gears or
Electric Devices action is unnecessary and causes in cities with many traffic lights. Winding
Use electrical systems only for the increased fuel consumption and mountain roads and rough road surfaces
amount of time needed. The rear window pollution. also adversely affect consumption.
defroster, additional headlights,
windshield wipers and heater blower fan Gear Selection Stops In Traffic
require a considerable amount of energy; Use a high gear when traffic and road During prolonged stops (e.g. railway
increasing the current uptake increases conditions allow it. Using a low gear for crossings) turn off the engine.
fuel consumption (by up to +25% when faster acceleration will increase fuel
city driving). consumption. Improper use of a high gear
increases consumption, emissions and
engine wear.

166
Transporting Passengers Exhaust Gas components which are broken, damaged,
worn or have moved from their correct
Exhaust emissions are very dangerous,
fitting position. If any of these things
Warning! and may be lethal. They contain carbon
occur, contact your authorized dealer.
monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas which
can cause fainting and poisoning if Open welding or loose connections may
It is extremely dangerous to leave inhaled. permit exhaust gas to enter the
children in a parked vehicle when the passenger compartment.
temperature outside is very high. The heat To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, take
the following measures: Check the exhaust system each time the
inside the passenger compartment may
have serious, or even fatal, consequences. vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
Do not keep the engine running in
change operations. Replace the
Never travel in the trunk of the vehicle. In closed spaces. components if necessary, contact your
the event of an accident, anyone inside the If, for some reason (e.g. transporting authorized dealer.
trunk would be at greater risk of serious or
bulky loads), it is necessary to drive with
even fatal injury. Performance
the trunk open, close all the windows and
Ensure that all the occupants of the This vehicle is equipped with an engine
run the climate control fan at maximum
vehicle wear their seat belts correctly and capable of delivering exceptionally fast
that any children are positioned correctly on speed. DO NOT activate air recirculation acceleration and speed:
the dedicated child restraint systems. mode.
Peak power: 505 HP at 6500 rpm.
Should it be necessary to stay in the
Peak torque: 443 ft-lbs at
Transporting Animals stationary vehicle with engine running,
25005000 rpm.
The intervention of the airbags may be adjust the ventilation/heating system
and operate the fan in such a way that Top speed: 191 mph (307 km/h).
dangerous for an animal on the front
seat. It is therefore advised to arrange outside air will enter the passenger Acceleration from 0 to 60 mph (0 to
animals on the rear seat inside dedicated compartment. Activate the maximum fan 100 km/h): 3.8 seconds.
cages restrained by the vehicles seat speed. For safe driving, it is essential,
belts. particularly during the first days of use,
Maintenance of the exhaust system
Keep in mind that, in the event of a provides the best protection against to get to know the car by driving carefully
sudden braking or an accident, an leaks of carbon monoxide into the and gradually discovering its
inadequately restrained animal may be passenger compartment. performance.
projected within the passenger
compartment, risking injury to the animal Should an unusual noise from the exhaust Brakes
itself and the other occupants of the system or the presence of exhaust gas in The car braking system may be available
vehicle. the passenger compartment be with four carbon-ceramic material brake
identified, or if the underbody or rear discs, one on each wheel.
section of the vehicle is damaged, have In order to guarantee the maximum
the entire exhaust system and bodywork braking capacity for the first use, Alfa
areas checked to identify any
167
Romeo performs a "run-in" procedure for Driving On Race Tracks keep the car at a speed comprised
STARTING AND OPERATING

discs and pads directly at the factory. Before driving on a track using a racing between 37 mph and 62 mph (60 km/h
The use of carbon-ceramic material style, it is necessary to: and 100 km/h) and do not brake for
brake discs guarantees braking features Attend a race track driving course. 4 minutes to allow the brakes to cool
(better deceleration/pedal load ratio, down;
Check the liquid levels in the engine
braking distances, fading resistance)
compartment. For more information, see Then brake three times from 124 mph
proportional to the dynamic features of
the car in addition to considerably the Checking Levels section in the to 18 mph (200 km/h to 30 km/h) with
decreasing the unsprung component Servicing And Maintenance chapter. deceleration equal to 1.1g (ABS
weight. Have the car inspected at your operation) with 30 second intervals
The materials used and the structural authorized dealer. between brake applications; keep the car
features of the system could generate at a speed comprised between 37 mph
Remember that the car was not designed and 62 mph (60 km/h and 100 km/h) and
unusual noises which have absolutely no
to be driven exclusive on the race track
adverse effect on correct operation and do not brake for 5 minutes to allow the
and that this use increases stress and
reliability of the braking system. brakes to cool down.
component wear.
Greater pressure may need to be applied
to the brake pedal the first time to keep Preheating the carbon ceramic material
the same braking capacities in presence brake discs
of condensation or salt on the braking The brake discs must be warmed up to
surfaces, for example after washing or if make them fully efficient. You are
the car is not used for a long time. advised to perform the following
Note: Given the high technological level procedure:
of this system, any servicing on it must be Brake nine times from 80 mph to
performed by your authorized dealer 18 mph (130 km/h to 30 km/h) with
which exclusively has the skills needed deceleration equal to 0.7g (the
for the repair operations. longitudinal acceleration value is shown
In case of intensive, high-performance on the instrument panel display by
use of the car, have the efficiency of the setting RACE mode and selecting the
carbon-ceramic material braking system Performance page) with 20 second
inspected as shown on the Maintenance
intervals between brake applications;
Plan at your authorized dealer.

168
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Have a flat tire or a burnt-out bulb? HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS . . . . .170


At times, a problem such as these may BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . .170
interfere with your driving experience. FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
TIRE SERVICE KIT . . . . . . . . . . . .181
The section on emergencies can help you JUMP STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . .184
to deal with critical situations
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY . . . . .187
independently.
ENGINE OVERHEATING . . . . . . . .187
In an emergency, we recommend that you TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . .188
call the phone number found in the TOW EYES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Warranty Book. ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE
You may also consider contacting your SYSTEM (EARS) . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
nearest authorized dealer. EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . . .190

169
HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS BULB REPLACEMENT
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

The Hazard Warning switch is located in Caution! General Instructions


the switch bank below the radio screen. Before replacing a bulb, check the
Push the switch once to Prolonged use of the hazard warning contacts for oxidation.
turn the hazard warning flashers may discharge the vehicles battery. Replace blown bulbs with others of the
flashers on. When the
same type and power.
switch is activated, all
directional turn signals After replacing a headlight bulb,
will flash on and off to always check its alignment.
warn oncoming traffic When a light is not working, check that
of an emergency. Push the switch a the corresponding fuse is intact before
second time to turn the hazard warning changing the bulb. For the location of
flashers off.
fuses, refer to Fuses in this chapter.
This is an emergency warning system and
it should not be used when the vehicle is Note: In some particular climate
in motion. Use it when your vehicle is conditions, such as low temperature,
disabled and is creating a safety hazard humidity, or after washing the car, a thin
for other motorists. condensation layer may form on the
When you must leave the vehicle to seek internal surfaces of the front and rear
assistance, the hazard warning flashers headlights. This condensation will
will continue to operate even though the disappear after switching on the
ignition is cycled to OFF. headlights.

08016S0001EM
Hazard Warning Switch

170
Types Of Bulbs

The vehicle may be equipped with the following bulbs

Glass Bulbs (Type A): They are press-fitted. Pull to extract.

Bayonet-Type Bulbs (Type B): To remove them from their holder, press the
bulb and turn it counterclockwise, then extract it.

Tubular Bulbs (Type C): Release them from their contacts to remove.

Halogen Bulbs (Type D): To remove the bulb, turn the connector to the side
and pull it out.

Xenon Gas Discharge Bulb (Type F): To remove the bulb, contact an
authorized dealer.

171
Replacement Bulbs
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Light bulbs Type Power


Front direction indicators PY24W 24 W
Rear Fog lights H11 55 W
Main beam headlights (Xenon gas discharge) D5S 25 W
Main beam headlights (Xenon gas discharge) D3S 35 W
Sun visor light 1.5CP 2.1 W
Glove compartment light W5W 4W
Trunk lid light W5W 5W
Puddle lights (under door panel) W5W 5W

172
Replacing Exterior Bulbs 3. Turn the bulb/connector assembly
Note: Only replace the bulb when the counterclockwise, and then slide it off
Caution!
engine is off. Also ensure that the engine the headlight body.
is cold, to prevent the risk of burns.
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers.
Direction Indicators Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb
To change the bulb of these lights, life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily
proceed as follows: surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.

1. Operating inside the engine


compartment, remove the protective Replacing Interior Bulbs
cover. Courtesy Mirror Light
To replace the bulbs, proceed as follows:
08026S0007EM 1. Lift the mirror cover and remove the
Bulb/Connector lens, using a suitable tool.
4. Remove the bulb by sliding it off the
bulb holder.
5. Install the new bulb, making sure it is
correctly inserted in the bulb holder.

08026S0023EM
6. Insert the bulb/connector assembly in
Protective Cover Location the housing on the headlight body and
turn it clockwise, making sure that it is
2. Remove protective cover. locked correctly.
7. Install the protective cover. 08026S0008EM

Front Light Cluster with Main Beam Sun Visor


Xenon Gas Discharge Headlights 1 Mirror Cover
To replace the bulbs of the main beam 2 Lens
headlights, contact your authorized
dealer.
2. Change the bulb, releasing it from the
side contacts, then insert the new bulb,
making sure that it is correctly fastened
08026S0006EM between the contacts.
Protective Cover
173
3. Install the lens, inserting it firstly on
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

one side and then pressing on the other


side until it clicks into place.
Glove Compartment Light
To replace the bulb, proceed as follows:
1. Open the glove compartment.
2. Remove the courtesy light assembly,
using a suitable tool.
08026S0011EM 08026S0010EM
Cover And Bulb Removal Direction Ceiling Light Indent
4. Install bulb, making sure that it is 2. Open protective cover up and remove
correctly inserted fully. the bulb pulling out of the connector.
5. Close the protective cover on the lens.
6. Install courtesy light, inserting it first
on one side and then pressing on the
other side until it clicks into place.
08026S0009EM Luggage Compartment Courtesy Lights
Courtesy Lamp Indent To replace the bulbs, proceed as follows:
3. Open protective cover up and remove 1. Open the trunk, and remove the trunk
the bulb pulling out of the connector. lamp assembly using a suitable tool.
08026S0011EM
Cover And Bulb Removal Direction
3. Install bulb, making sure that it is
correctly inserted fully.

174
4. Close the protective cover on the lens. FUSES
5. Install trunk lamp in the correct General Information
position, inserting it firstly on one side,
The fuses protect electrical systems
and then pressing on the other side until
against excessive current.
it clicks into place.
When a device does not work, you must
Puddle Lights On Door Panel check the electrical circuit inside of the
To replace the bulb, proceed as follows: fuse for a break/melt.
Also, please be aware that using power
1. Open the door and remove the puddle outlets for extended periods of time with
light assembly, using a suitable tool. the engine off may result in vehicle
08026S0011EM
Cover And Bulb Removal Direction battery discharge.
3. Install bulb, making sure that it is 1
correctly inserted fully.
4. Close the protective cover on the lens.
2
5. Install puddle light in the correct
position, inserting it firstly on one side
and then pressing on the other side until
it clicks into place. 3
08026S0012EM
Puddle Light Indent 0726067916

2. Open protective cover up and remove Blade Fuses


the bulb pulling out of the connector. 1 Electrical Circuit
2 Blade Fuse With Good Electrical
Circuit
3 Blade Fuse With Bad Electrical Cir-
cuit

175
Grab the pliers from the upper tabs,
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

press them, and extract the pliers pulling


Warning!
upwards.
The pliers have two different ends, both
of which are specifically designed to When replacing a blown fuse, always use
remove the different types of fuses an appropriate replacement fuse with the
present in the vehicle: same amp rating as the original fuse. Never
replace a fuse with another fuse of higher
amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with
metal wires or any other material. Do not
place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity
08036S0002EM or vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses
J-CASE Fuse may result in serious personal injury, fire
and/or property damage.
1 Electrical Circuit
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that
2 Case Fuse With Good Electrical Cir- the ignition is off and that all the other
cuit services are switched off and/or
3 Case Fuse With Bad Electrical Cir- disengaged.
cuit If the replaced fuse blows again, contact
08036S0005EM
Fuse Extracting Pliers an authorized dealer.
Fuse Extracting Pliers If a general protection fuse for safety
1 MINI fuse
To replace a fuse, use the pliers hooked systems (air bag system, braking system),
2 J-CASE fuse power unit systems (engine system,
to the fuse box.
transmission system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
After use, return the pliers to their proper
position by following the below
procedures: Fuse Location
Grasp the pliers from the upper tabs The fuses, which can be replaced by the
and insert them into their housing. user, are grouped in two boxes below the
Push downward on the pliers into their passenger side foot board and inside the
trunk.
housing until they click into place.

08036S0053EM
Fuse Box

176
Control Unit Under Passenger Side 2. Unscrewing the two hooks, remove Luggage Compartment Fuse Box
Footboard the panel pulling downward.
To access the fuses, proceed as follows:
To access the fuses, proceed as follows:
1. Lift the luggage compartment cover.
1. Lift the upper end of the footboard on
the passenger side, pulling to release the 2. Remove the control unit cover.
two buttons.

08036S0011EM

Release Hooks On Footboard

2 Panel 08036S0014EM
Control Unit
08036S0010EM The fuses are freely accessible on the
control unit. The fuses are freely accessible on the
Release Buttons On Footboard control unit.
After replacing the fuse, make sure that
1 Footboard panel and footboard are correctly locked. The number identifying the electrical
component corresponding to each fuse is
shown on the cover.
After replacing a fuse, make sure that
you have closed cover correctly.

177
Control Unit Under Passenger Side Footboard
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

08036S0013EM
Passenger Side Control Unit

FUNCTION FUSE AMPERAGE


Front power window (driver side) F33 25
Front power window (passenger side) F34 25
Supply for Information and Entertainment system, Climate Control
F36 15
system, Alarm, Power door mirror folding, EOBD system, USB port
Safe Lock device (driver side door unlock if equipped), Doors
F38 20
unlock, Central lock
Windshield washer pump F43 20

178
FUNCTION FUSE AMPERAGE
Rear left power window F47 25
Rear right power window F48 25
Heater rear window coil F94 15

179
Luggage Compartment Fuse Box
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

08036S0015EM
Luggage Compartment Control Unit

FUNCTION FUSE AMPERAGE


Tow hook module (TTM) F1 40
Hi-Fi system F8 30
KL15/a USB Recharge (C070) F17 7.5
I-Drive / USB / AUX port F21 10
KL15/a 12V Power outlet (R053) F22 20

180
TIRE SERVICE KIT the personnel dealing with the the hazard warning flashers, remove the
sealant-treated tire. safety triangle from the trunk, and place
Description it at a suitable distance from the vehicle
A pair of protective gloves.
If a tire is punctured, you can make an to make other drivers aware of your
emergency repair using the Tire Service Adaptors for inflating different presence.
Kit located in the trunk beneath the load elements.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the
floor.
wheel with the deflated tire) is in a
position that is near to the ground. This
will allow the tire service kit hoses to
reach the valve stem and keep the tire
repair kit flat on the ground.
3. Place the gear selector to PARK (P).
4. Apply the electric park brake and
cycle the engine OFF.
Inflation Procedure
08066S0002EM
08066S0001EM Tire Service Kit Components
Tire Service Kit Location
1 Sealant Cartridge Warning!
The Tire Service Kit includes: 2 Filler Tube
Sealant cartridge containing the 3 Adhesive Label Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of
sealing fluid. 4 Air Compressor the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough
off the road to avoid the danger of being hit
Filler tube. when using the Tire Service Kit.
Note: The sealant is effective with
Adhesive label with the writing "Max. Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the
external temperatures of between -40F
50 mph (80 km/h), to be attached in a vehicle under the following circumstances:
(-40C) and 122F (50C). The sealant
position easily visible to the driver (eg. on
has an expiration date. If the puncture in the tire tread is
the dashboard) after repairing the tire. approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
To use the Tire Service Kit, proceed as
Air compressor, complete with follows: If the tire has any sidewall damage.
pressure gauge and connectors.
1. Stop the vehicle in a position where If the tire has any damage from driving
An instruction pamphlet for reference you can repair the tire safely. You should with extremely low tire pressure.
in prompt and correct use of the Tire be as far as possible from the side of the If the tire has any damage from driving on
Service Kit, which must be then given to road, and in a position that is not a flat tire.
dangerous for oncoming traffic. Activate
If the wheel has any damage.
181
To use your Tire Service Kit, proceed as 4. Insert the plug into the power outlet in
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

If you are unsure of the condition of the


tire or the wheel. follows: the center console, then start the engine.
Keep Tire Service Kit away from open 1. Apply the electric park brake.
flames or heat sources.
2. Insert the sealant cartridge containing
A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in the sealing fluid in the proper
a collision or hard stop could endanger the compressor holder, pushing down hard.
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the
Tire Service Kit in the place provided. Failure
Unscrew the tire valve cap, take out the
to follow these warnings can result in filler tube and tighten the fitting on the
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your tire valve.
passengers, and others around you.
Take care not to allow the contents of Tire
Service Kit to come in contact with hair, 08066S0006EM
eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is Center Console Power Outlet
harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed
through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and 5. Start the compressor by placing the
respiratory irritation. Flush immediately power switch in the I (on) position.
with plenty of water if there is any contact
with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon 6. Inflate the tire to the pressure
as possible, if there is any contact with indicated on the tire placard, located on
clothing. the drivers side B-Pillar or the rear edge
Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains 08066S0004EM of the drivers side door. Refer to Tires
latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash, Attaching Filler Tube To Deflated Tire in Servicing And Maintenance for more
consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire information. In order to obtain a more
1 Sealant Cartridge precise reading, check the pressure value
Service Kit out of reach of children. If
swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with 2 Filler Tube on pressure gauge with the compressor
plenty of water and drink plenty of water. off.
Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician
immediately.
3. Make sure the power switch of the
compressor is in the O (off) position.

182
9. Drive the vehicle for about 5 miles 12. Apply the adhesive label from the
(8 km), stop, apply the electric park sealant bottle where it can be easily seen
brake, and recheck the tire pressure. by the driver as a reminder that the tire
has been treated with a Tire Service Kit,
10. If the pressure is less than 26 psi as well as not to exceed the speed
(1.8 bar), DO NOT drive the vehicle, and restriction for the treated tire.
see your authorized dealer.
11. If a pressure value of at least 26 psi Warning!
(1.8 bar) is detected, restore the correct
pressure (with engine running and
08066S0005EM
electric park brake applied), and drive Do not adhere the speed restriction sticker
immediately with great care to your to the padded area on the steering wheel.
Air Compressor Adhering the speed restriction sticker to the
authorized dealer.
5 Power Switch padded area on the steering wheel is
6 Pressure Gauge dangerous because the air bag may not
Warning! operate (deploy) normally resulting in
serious injury. In addition, do not adhere the
7. If the pressure is not at least 26.1 psi sticker to areas where warning lights or the
(1.8 bar) after 15 minutes, disengage the Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire speedometer cannot be viewed.
repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired
compressor from the valve and power
or replaced after using Tire Service Kit. Do
outlet. Then, move the vehicle forwards not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until the tire is
approximately five tire turns in order to repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this
distribute the sealant inside the tire warning can result in injuries that are serious
evenly, and then repeat the inflation or fatal to you, your passengers, and others
operation. around you. Have the tire checked as soon as
possible at your authorized dealer.
8. If you still cannot obtain a pressure of
at least 26 psi (1.8 bar) within
15 minutes of turning the compressor on,
do not drive the vehicle, and contact your
authorized dealer.

183
Checking And Restoring Tire Pressure Sealant Cartridge Replacement JUMP STARTING
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

The compressor can also be used to Note: Only use original cartridges, which If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it
check and, if necessary, restore the tire can be purchased at an authorized dealer. can be jump started using a set of jumper
pressure. Proceed as follows: cables and a battery in another vehicle, or
Proceed as follows: by using a portable battery booster pack.
1. Remove the sealant cartridge by Jump starting can be dangerous if done
1. Release the quick connector and pushing the release button located on the improperly, so please follow the
connect it directly to the valve of the tire side of the compressor. procedures in this section carefully.
to be inflated.
2. Insert the new sealant cartridge by Note: When using a portable battery
2. Push the air release button. pushing downward firmly. booster pack, follow the manufacturer's
operating instructions and precautions.

Warning!

Do not attempt jump starting if the battery


is frozen. It could rupture or explode and
cause personal injury.

Caution!
08066S0008EM 08066S0009EM
Air Compressor Components Sealant Cartridge Replacement
Do not use a portable battery booster pack
7 Air Release Button 1 Sealant Cartridge or any other booster source with a system
8 Quick Connector 9 Release Button voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to
9 Release Button the battery, starter motor, alternator or
electrical system may occur.

184
Remote Battery Connection Posts Jump Starting
The negative terminal (-) is positioned
next to the passenger side hood lock.
Warning!

Failure to follow this jump starting


procedure could result in personal injury or
property damage due to battery explosion.

08076S0004EM Caution!
Protective Flap Opening
Failure to follow these procedures could
08076S0006EM result in damage to the charging system of
Remote Post Location the booster vehicle or the discharged
vehicle.

Warning! Preparation For Jump Starting:


1. Firmly apply the park brake, and cycle
Do not connect the jumper cable to the
the ignition to OFF.
negative (-) post of the discharged battery. 2. Turn off all electrical features in the
The resulting electrical spark could cause vehicle.
the battery to explode and could result in
serious injury. Only use the specific ground 08076S0005EM
3. If using another vehicle to jump start
point, do not use any other exposed metal Remote Post Location
the battery, park the vehicle within the
parts. To carry out the operation, you need to jumper cables reach, apply the park brake
have the correct cables to connect to the and make sure the ignition is OFF.
The positive post (+) can be accessed by battery of another vehicle or a portable
lifting the protective flap. battery booster pack to the remote posts
of the discharged battery. Usually, these Warning!
cables have terminals at the ends and are
identified by different sheath colors (red
= positive, black = negative). Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as
this could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
185
Cable Connection Cable Disconnection Bump Starting
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Proceed as follows to perform a jump Once the engine is started, remove the Never jump start the engine by pushing,
starting procedure: connection cables in reverse sequence, towing or coasting downhill.
as described below:
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the Note: You cannot start a vehicle with an
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of 1. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper automatic transmission by pushing it.
the vehicle with the discharged battery. cable from the remote negative (-) post
of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the
positive (+) jumper cable to the positive 2. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the
(+) post of the booster battery. jumper cable from the negative (-) post of
the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the
jumper cable to the negative (-) post of 3. Disconnect the opposite end of the
the booster battery. positive (+) jumper cable from the
positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the
negative (-) jumper cable to the remote 4. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the
negative (-) post of the discharged jumper cable from the positive (+) post of
vehicle. the vehicle with the discharged battery.
If frequent jump starting is required to
Warning! start your vehicle, you should have the
battery and charging system inspected at
your authorized dealer.
Do not connect the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the discharged battery.
The resulting electrical spark could cause Caution!
the battery to explode and could result in
serious injury. Only use the specific ground
point, do not use any other exposed metal Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
parts. outlets draw power from the vehicles
battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular
phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has enough without engine operation, the
the booster battery, let the engine idle a vehicles battery will discharge sufficiently
few minutes, and then start the engine in to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
the vehicle with the discharged battery. If engine from starting.
using a portable battery booster pack,
before starting the vehicle, wait a few
seconds after completing the connection.
186
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY ENGINE OVERHEATING
Refueling in an emergency is described in Engine overheating may occur in Warning!
"Refueling The Vehicle" in "Starting And situations of extreme environmental
Operating". temperatures, frequent engine
stops/starts, or driving in heavy traffic. If You or others can be badly burned by hot
the engine becomes overheated, the engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
Engine Temperature Warning Light in the your radiator. If you see or hear steam
coming from under the hood, do not open the
instrument cluster will illuminate along
hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
with a dedicated message. Refer to Never try to open a cooling system pressure
"Warning Lights And Messages" in the cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is
"Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" hot.
for more information.
In any of the following situations, you can
reduce the potential for overheating by Caution!
taking the appropriate action.
On the highways slow down. Driving with a hot cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge
In city traffic while stopped, place
reads H, pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle
the transmission in NEUTRAL, but do not the vehicle with the air conditioner turned
increase engine idle speed. off until the pointer drops back into the
Note: There are steps that you can take normal range. If the pointer remains on the
to slow down an impending overheat H, turn the engine off immediately, and call
for service.
condition:
If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn
it off. The A/C system adds heat to the If Steam Is Coming From The Engine
engine cooling system and turning the Compartment
A/C off can help remove this heat. Do not go near the front of the vehicle.
Stop the engine. Wait until the steam
You can also turn the temperature dissipates. Then, open the hood and start
control to maximum heat, the mode the engine.
control to floor and the blower control to
high. This allows the heater core to act
as a supplement to the radiator and aids
in removing heat from the engine cooling
system.

187
If Neither Coolant Nor Steam Is TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE The operators of the assistance vehicle
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Escaping must be informed of your vehicle's


This section describes procedures for minimum required height from the
Open the hood and idle the engine until it towing a disabled vehicle using a
cools. ground, in order to avoid contact
commercial towing service. between the ends of the bumpers and the
Note: equipment of the breakdown truck.
If the cooling fan does not operate Caution! The following image illustrates the front
while the engine is running, the engine and rear attachment corners of the
temperature will increase. Stop the vehicle, which are to be taken into
The vehicle should be transported with all consideration when loading your vehicle
engine and contact your authorized
four wheels OFF the ground on the flatbed
dealer. onto the assistance vehicle.
of a roadside assistance vehicle. Avoid
If the engine continues to overheat or towing with only the front (or rear) wheels
frequently overheats, have the cooling lifted. When towing with only the front (or
rear) wheels lifted, in addition to damaging
system inspected. The engine could be
the body, it could damage the transmission.
seriously damaged unless repairs are
made. Contact your authorized dealer. Do not use sling-type equipment when
towing. Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flatbed
truck, do not attach to front or rear
suspension components. Damage to your
vehicle may result from improper towing.
08126S0001EM
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is
released, and remain released, while being Front And Rear Loading Angles
towed.
Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.

Loading Angles
A Front Loading Angle 12.045
B Rear Loading Angle 11.830

188
Rear Wheel Drive (RWD) Models TOW EYES
It is recommended to tow the vehicle If the vehicle has been in an accident or
with all four wheels OFF the ground on has broken down, a tow eye is provided in
the flatbed of a roadside assistance the tools container located inside the
vehicle. trunk for vehicle towing. Two locations on
the front bumper are available for Tow
Caution! Eye installation. Towing is meant only for
short distances on a paved road surface.
Proceed as follows to use the tow eye:
Do not use sling type equipment when
towing. Vehicle damage may occur. 1. Unhook the cap on the left or right 08136S0002EM
side of the front bumper, pushing on the Work Angle Of Tow Cable
When securing the vehicle to a flat bed upper part.
truck, do not attach to front or rear
suspension components. Damage to your
vehicle may result from improper towing. Warning!

Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is


released, and remains released, while being Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
towed. eyes.
Do not use a chain with a tow eye. Chains
may break, causing serious injury or death.
If an assistance vehicle with a flatbed is
not available, the vehicle must be towed Do not use a tow strap with a tow eye. Tow
straps may break or become disengaged,
with the rear wheels lifted from the
causing serious injury or death.
ground using a trailer or special 08136S0001EM
equipment allowing lifting of the rear Failure to follow proper tow eye usage
Front Tow Eye Cap Locations
wheels. may cause components to break resulting in
2. Remove the tow eye from its housing serious injury or death.
in the trunk and carefully clean the
threaded housing on the vehicle before
using it.
3. Tighten the vehicle's tow eye in place
(about 11 turns).
Note: The largest work angle of a tow
cable to fix on the tow hook must not
exceed 15.

189
ENHANCED ACCIDENT EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Caution! RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS) This vehicle is equipped with an Event


This vehicle is equipped with an Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose
Enhanced Accident Response System. of an EDR is to record data that will
The tow eye must be used exclusively for assist in understanding how a vehicles
roadside assistance operations. Only use Please refer to Occupant Restraint
Systems in Safety for further systems performed under certain crash
the tow eye with an appropriate device in
accordance with the highway code (a rigid information on the Enhanced Accident or near crash-like situations, such as an
bar or rope) to flat tow the vehicle for a Response System (EARS) function. air bag deployment or hitting a road
short distance to the nearest service obstacle.
location. Please refer to Occupant Restraint
Tow eyes MUST NOT be used to tow Systems in Safety for further
vehicles off the road or where there are information on the Event Data Recorder
obstacles. (EDR).
In compliance with the above conditions,
towing with a tow eye must take place with
two vehicles (one towing, the other towed)
aligned as much as possible along the same
center line. Damage to your vehicle may
occur if these guidelines are not followed.
When towing, only use a facility that can
tow vehicles with low ground clearances as
extensive damage can result by using a
standard tow truck platform.

190
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Correct servicing permits the SCHEDULED SERVICING . . . . . . .192


performance of the vehicle to be ENGINE COMPARTMENT . . . . . . .196
maintained over time, as well as limited BATTERY RECHARGING . . . . . . . .199
running costs and safeguarding the DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . .200
efficiency of the safety systems. RAISING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . . .206
This chapter explains how. TIRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES . .222
STORING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . .223
BODYWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
INTERIORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225

191
SCHEDULED SERVICING Brake fluid level (if insufficient, see Check cleanliness of hood and trunk
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Correct servicing is crucial for your authorized dealer as soon as locks, cleanliness and lubrication of
guaranteeing a long life for the vehicle possible). linkage.
under the best conditions. Windshield washer fluid level. Visually inspect conditions of: engine,
For this reason, Alfa Romeo has planned Tire inflation pressure and condition. transmission, pipes and hoses
a series of checks and services for your (exhaust/fuel system/brakes) and rubber
vehicle at fixed intervals based on Operation of lighting system
(headlights, direction indicators, hazard elements (sleeves/bushes, etc.).
distance and time, as described in the
Scheduled Servicing Plan. warning lights, etc.). Check battery charge and battery fluid
Operation of windshield level (electrolyte).
Before each service, it is always
necessary to carefully follow the washing/wiping system and Visually inspect conditions of the
instructions in the Scheduled Servicing positioning/wear of wiper blades. accessory drive belts.
Plan (e.g. periodically check level of Check and, if necessary, change engine
fluids, tire pressure, etc.). Every 2,000 miles ( 3,000 km), check and
top off if required: oil and replace oil filter.
Scheduled Servicing is offered by an Check and, if necessary, replace cabin
authorized dealer according to a set time Engine oil level.
air filter.
schedule. If, during each operation, in Heavy Usage Of The Vehicle
addition to the ones scheduled, the need Check and, if necessary, replace air
arises for further replacements or If the vehicle is used under one of the cleaner.
repairs, these may be carried out with the following conditions:
Severe Duty All Models
owners explicit consent only. Dusty roads.
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles
Note: Scheduled Servicing intervals are Short, repeated journeys less than (6,500 km) if the vehicle is operated in a
required by the Manufacturer. Failure to 4 miles (7-8 km) at sub-zero outside dusty and off-road environment or is
have them carried out may invalidate the temperatures. operated predominately at idle or only
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. very low engine RPMs. This type of
Engine often idling or driving long
You are advised to inform your vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
authorized dealer of any small operating distances at low speeds or long periods
irregularities without waiting for the next of inactivity.
service. In the event of a long period of
Periodic Checks inactivity.

Every month or every 600 miles The following checks must be carried out
( 1,000 km) or before long trips check more often than indicated in the
and, if necessary, top off: Scheduled Servicing Plan:
Engine coolant level.

192
Maintenance Plan (2.9 V6 Engine)

100
110
120
130
140
150
10

30

50
60
70
80
90
20

40
Thousands of miles

Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

112
128
144
160
176
192
208
224
240
16

48

80
96
32

64
Thousands of kilometers

Check battery charge status with the proper instrument.


Check tire condition/wear and adjust pressure, if necessary.
Check the tire repair kit recharge condition and expiration
date.
Check operation of lighting system (headlights, direction
indicators, hazard warning lights, trunk lid, passenger

compartment, glove compartment, instrument panel warning
lights, etc.).
Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels.(1)
Check engine control system operation (via diagnostic tool).
Visually inspect conditions of: exterior bodywork, underbody
protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust, fuel system, brakes),
rubber elements (sleeves, bushes, etc.).
Check position/wear of front windshield wiper blade.
Check operation of the windshield wiper/washer system and

adjust nozzles, if necessary.
Check cleanliness of hood and luggage compartment locks,

cleanliness and lubrication of linkage.

(1) Top up using the fluids indicated in the Fluids And Lubricants section of the Technical Specifications chapter only after checking that the system is intact.
193
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

100
110
120
130
140
150
10

30

50
60
70
80
90
20

40
Thousands of miles

Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

112
128
144
160
176
192
208
224
240
16

48

80
96
32

64
Thousands of kilometers

Visually inspect conditions and wear of front/rear disc brake



pads and operation of pad wear indicators.
Brake disc wear status check with diagnostic tool.
Visually inspect the brake discs surface and edge.
Brake pads/brake discs replacement. (2)
Visually inspect the condition and tensioning of the

accessory drive belt(s).
Change engine coolant
Change engine oil and replace oil filter.
Replace accessory drive belt/s. (3)
Replace air cleaner cartridge (4)
Replace the additional fuel filter (if equipped).
Change the brake fluid. (5)

(2) The actual interval for changing the brake pads and the carbon ceramic brake discs depends on the vehicle usage conditions and is signaled by the warning light or
message on the instrument panel. It is advisable to check brake disc weight and thickness after each intensive use.
(3) Areas that are not dusty: recommended maximum mileage 36,000 miles (60,00 km). Regardless of the mileage, the belt must be replaced every 4 years. Dusty areas
and/or demanding use of the vehicle (cold climates, town use, long periods of idling): advised maximum mileage 18,000 miles (30,000 km). Regardless of the mileage,
the belt must be replaced every 2 years.
(4) If the vehicle is used in dusty areas, this cleaner must be replaced every 10,000 miles (16,000 km).
(5) The brake fluid replacement has to be done every two years, irrespective of the mileage.
194
100
110
120
130
140
150
10

30

50
60
70
80
90
20

40
Thousands of miles

Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

112
128
144
160
176
192
208
224
240
16

48

80
96
32

64
Thousands of kilometers

Replace the cabin air filter (6) o o o o o o o o


Spark plug replacement.*

(6) If the vehicle is used in dusty areas, this cleaner must be replaced every 10,000 miles (16,000 km).
* The spark plug change interval is mileage-based only. Yearly intervals do not apply.
(o) Recommended operations
() Mandatory operations

Warning!

You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment.
If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance.
This could cause an accident.

195
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Checking Levels
2.9L V6 engine,

09026S0001EM

1 Engine Oil Dipstick 4 Windshield/Headlight Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap


2 Engine Oil Filler 5 Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap Access Cover
3 Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap 6 Intercooler Coolant Reservoir Cap

196
Engine Oil Note: Always reinstall the oil cap and
The engine oil level can be seen on the tighten to proper torque whenever it is
Warning!
instrument cluster display every time the removed to add oil to engine. Never run
engine is started, or on the Information the engine with cap removed this could
and Entertainment system display by cause oil to leak from engine. If the engine oil is being topped up, wait for
activating on the main menu (MENU the engine to cool down before loosening the
Manual oil level checking procedure
button) the following functions in filler cap, particularly for vehicles with
Check that the oil level is between the aluminium cap (if equipped). WARNING: risk
sequence: Apps; My Car and Oil
MIN and MAX marks on dipstick, clean it of burns!
Level.
with a lint-free cloth and reinsert it.
Check on the display using the 6 notches Extract the dipstick again and check that
that the oil level is between the MIN and the level is between the MIN and MAX Caution!
MAX level: 1 notch MIN level, 6 notches marks.
MAX level.
If the oil level is close to or below the MIN Top-Up And Oil Level Indication Update The oil level must never exceed the MAX
mark, add oil gradually through the filler, On Display mark.
(refer to Top-Up And Oil Level Indication If a engine oil top-off is needed, in order
If the MAX mark is exceeded MAX (last
Update On Display in this section) to ensure the correct indication of the oil
notch on the right turns red) after the fill-up,
considering that each notch shown on the level on the display, leave the vehicle on go to your authorized dealer as soon as
display corresponds to approximately flat ground with the engine running for possible to have the oil in excess removed.
8.8 fl oz (250 ml). approximately 5 minutes (temperature
higher than 176F (80C)) and shut the Do not add oil with specifications
The oil level can also be checked different from those of the oil already in the
manually. engine off then proceed with the process
below: engine.
Used engine oil and oil filters contain
Caution! Wait for five minutes, turn the ignition
substances which are harmful to the
to the ON mode without starting the environment. To change the oil and filters,
engine and wait for a few seconds. we advise you to contact your authorized
Make sure not to add too much oil when Note: If you have added the specified dealer.
topping off the engine. Engine oil in excess
amount of oil and the indicator is not
may damage the engine. Have the vehicle
checked. Never exceed the MAX level when reading Full, please contact you Engine Coolant Fluid
topping off engine oil. It is advisable to authorized dealer.
If the level is too low, unscrew the cap of
check the oil level in intermediate steps reservoir and add the fluid described in
using the oil dipstick.
the "Technical Specifications" chapter.
The oil level is not refreshed immediately on
the display after topping off. Consequently,
wait for the oil level to be refreshed on the
display and follow the procedure below.
197
Washer Fluid For Windshield/ Useful Advice For Extending The Life Note: After the battery is disconnected,
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Headlights Of Your Battery the steering must be initialized. The


The windshield and headlights washer warning light on the instrument panel
To avoid draining your battery and make
fluid reservoir has a telescopic filler. switches on to indicate this. To carry out
it last longer, observe the following
If the level is too low, remove reservoir this procedure, simply turn the steering
instructions:
cap and lift the filler. Then, add the fluid wheel all the way from one end to the
When you park the car, ensure that the other, and then turn it back to the central
described in the "Technical doors and trunk are closed properly to
Specifications" chapter. position.
prevent any lights from remaining on
Note: The headlight washing system will Battery
inside the passenger's compartment.
not work if the liquid level is low (as The battery does not require the
indicated by the symbol on the Do not keep accessories (e.g. radio, electrolyte to be topped up with distilled
instrument cluster display). The hazard warning lights, etc.) switched on water. A periodic check carried out at an
windshield washer will keep working. On for a long time when the engine is not authorized dealer, however, is necessary
vehicles equipped with headlight running. to check efficiency.
washers, if equipped, there is a reference Before performing any operation on Follow the battery manufacturer's
notch on the dipstick: ONLY the the electrical system, disconnect the instructions for maintenance.
windshield/rear window washer operates
negative battery cable. Replacing The Battery
with the level below this reference.
If you wish to install electrical If necessary, replace the battery with
Brake Fluid
accessories after purchasing the car that another original battery with the same
Check that the fluid is at the maximum require permanent electrical supply (e.g. specifications. Follow the battery
level. If the fluid level in the tank is low, alarm, etc.), or accessories which manufacturers instructions for
contact your authorized dealer to have influence the electrical supply maintenance.
the system checked. requirements, contact your authorized
Automatic Transmission Activation dealer, whose qualified staff will evaluate
System Oil the overall electrical consumption. Warning!
The transmission control oil level should
only be checked at your authorized Caution! Battery acid is a corrosive solution and
dealer. can burn or even blind you. Do not allow
battery acid to contact your eyes, skin, or
If the charge level remains under 50% for a clothing. Do not lean over a battery when
long time, the battery may be damaged by attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or
sulphation, reducing its capacity and on skin, flush the area immediately with
efficiency at start the vehicle. The battery is large amounts of water. Refer to Jump
also more prone to the risk of freezing (at Starting in In Case Of Emergency for
temperatures as high as 14F (-10C). further information.

198
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. BATTERY RECHARGING
Keep flame or sparks away from the Important Notes
battery. Do not use a booster battery or any
other booster source with an output greater
than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other. Warning!
Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead Never charge or recharge a frozen
compounds. Wash hands after handling. battery: it may explode because of the
nitrogen trapped inside the ice crystals.
Note: It will not be possible to open the At all times while charging or recharging 09036S0001EM
trunk with a key or by pressing the button the battery, make sure that any sparks or Battery Access Panel
in the passenger compartment when the open flames are kept sufficiently far away
battery is disconnected. So, always from the battery. Remove the protective cover and
position the manual trunk opening strap connect the positive cable terminal of the
on the trunk lock before disconnecting charger (usually red) to the positive
Note: terminal (+) of the battery.
the battery. The procedure is described in
the "Storing The Vehicle" paragraph in Before using the charging device, Connect the negative terminal of the
this chapter. always make sure that it is appropriate charger (usually black) to nut next to the
for the installed battery, with constant negative terminal (-) of the battery.
voltage (below 14.8 V) and low
amperage (maximum 15 A).
Recharge the battery in a well
ventilated environment.
Before using any devices to charge or
to maintain the charge of the battery,
carefully follow the instructions
provided with the device in order to
properly and safely connect it to the car
battery.
09036S0002EM
You can recharge the battery without
Battery
disconnecting the wires of the vehicle's
electrical system. 1 Protective Cover
To reach the battery, remove the 2 Negative Post (Nut)
access panel inside the trunk.
199
The vehicle is equipped with an IBS DEALER SERVICE Choice Of Engine Oil Type
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

(Intelligent Battery Sensor), which is able The following pages contain instructions To ensure optimal performance and
to measure the charge and discharge on the required maintenance from the maximum protection in all operating
voltage and calculate the charge level technical personnel who designed the conditions, it is advisable to use solely
and the general condition of the battery. vehicle. certified engine oils (see description in
The sensor is placed next to the negative "Fluid And Lubricants" in the "Technical
In addition to these specific maintenance
terminal (-) of the battery. Specifications" chapter).
instructions specified for routine
For a correct charge/discharge scheduled servicing, there are other Additives For Engine Oil
procedure, the charge voltage must go components which may require periodic
through the IBS sensor. It is strongly recommended not to use
maintenance or replacement over the additives (other than leak detection dyes)
1. Turn the charger on and follow the vehicles life cycle. with the engine oil.
instructions on the user's manual to Engine Oil The engine oil is a product designed
completely recharge the battery. specially for the vehicle and its
Engine Oil Level Check
2. When the battery is charged, turn the performance may be deteriorated
To ensure correct engine lubrication, the through the use of further additives.
charger off before disconnecting it from oil must always be kept at the prescribed
the battery. level (see "Engine Compartment" in this Disposal Of Used Engine Oil And Filters
3. Disconnect the black cable terminal of chapter). For the disposal of the engine oil and
the battery charger and then the red Check the oil level at regular intervals, for filters, contact the appropriate body to
cable terminal. example every 1864 miles (3000 km). determine local regulations.
It must be checked once full operating Note: Used engine oil disposed of
4. Refit the protective cover of the incorrectly may seriously harm the
temperature is reached.
positive terminal of the battery and the environment.
access cover to the battery The vehicle must also be parked on as
compartment. level a surface as possible. Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil level can be checked using
Note: If a "quick-type" battery charger is Replacing The Engine Oil Filter
the Information and Entertainment
used with the battery fitted on the The engine oil filter must be replaced
system. To access the function, activate
vehicle, before connecting it disconnect each time the engine oil is changed. It is
the main menu (MENU button) and select
both cables of the battery itself. Do not advised to replace it with a genuine spare
the following options in sequence:
use a "quick-type" battery charger to part, specifically designed for this
Applications; My Car; Oil level.
provide the starting voltage. vehicle.
Changing The Engine Oil
See the "Maintenance Plan" for the
correct servicing intervals.

200
Air Filter Lubricate the external lock barrels twice
a year. Apply a small amount of
Replacing The Air Cleaner Warning!
high-quality lubricant directly into the
See the "Maintenance Plan" for the lock barrel.
correct servicing intervals. It is advised to
Use only refrigerants and compressor If necessary, contact your authorized
replace it with a genuine spare part, lubricants approved by the manufacturer for dealer as soon as possible.
specifically designed for this vehicle. your air conditioning system. Some
unapproved refrigerants are flammable and Windshield Wiper
Air Conditioning System Maintenance
can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved
Periodically clean the windshield and rear
To ensure the best possible performance, refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer window and rubber profile of the
the air conditioning system must be
to Warranty Information Book, located in windshield wiper blades, using a sponge
checked and undergo maintenance at an
your owners information kit, for further or a soft cloth and a non-abrasive
authorized dealer at the beginning of the
warranty information. detergent. This eliminates the salt or
summer.
impurities accumulated when driving.
Lubricating Moving Parts Of The Prolonged operation of the windshield
Caution! window wipers with dry glass may cause
Bodywork
the deterioration of the blades, in
Ensure that the locks and bodywork addition to abrasion of the surface of the
Do not use chemicals to clean the air junction points, including components
conditioning system, since the internal glass. To eliminate the impurities on the
components may be damaged. This kind of
such as the seat guides, door hinges (and dry glass, always operate the windshield
damage is not covered by warranty. rollers), trunk and hood are periodically washers.
lubricated with lithium-based grease to In the event of very low outdoor
ensure correct, silent operation and to temperatures, below zero degrees,
Replace The Cabin Air Filter protect them from rust and wear. ensure that the movement of the rubber
See the "Maintenance Plan" for the Thoroughly clean the components, part in contact with the glass is not
correct servicing intervals. For cleaner eliminating every trace of dirt and dust. obstructed. Use a suitable deicing
replacement, contact an authorized After lubricating, eliminate excess oil and product to release it if required.
dealer. grease. Also pay particular attention to Avoid using the windshield wipers to
the hood closing devices, to ensure remove frost or ice.
correct operation. During operations on
the hood, to be carried out with the Also avoid contact of the rubber profile
engine cold, also remember to check, of the blades with petroleum derivatives
clean and lubricate the locking, release such as engine oil, gas, etc.
and safety devices.

201
To activate this function, move the lever Replacing The Windshield Wiper Blades
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

upward for at least three seconds. Proceed as follows:


Warning!
1. Raise the wiper arm, press tab of the
Driving with worn windshield wiper blades is attachment spring and remove the blade
a serious hazard, because visibility is from the arm.
reduced in bad weather conditions.

Note: The life of the windshield wiper


blades varies according to the usage
frequency. In any case, it is advised to
replace the blades approximately once a
year. When the blades are worn, noise, 09046S0001EM
marks on the glass or streaks of water Windshield Wiper Stalk
may be noticed. In the presence of these
conditions, clean the windshield wiper Function Deactivation
blades or, if necessary, replace them. The function is deactivated if: 09046S0002EM

More than two minutes passes before Wiper Release Tab


Raising The Windshield Wiper Blades
("Service Position" Function) cycling the ignition to the STOP position 2. Fit the new blade, inserting the tab in
The "service position" function allows the after having raised the lever and putting the dedicated housing in the arm and
driver to replace the windshield wiper the wipers into service position. checking that it is locked.
blades more easily. It is also The ignition is cycled to the ON 3. Lower the wiper arm onto the
recommended to activate this function position and the windshield wiper control windshield.
when it is snowing and to make it easier is used.
to remove any dirt deposits in the area Note: Do not operate the windshield
where the blades are normally If, after using the function, the ignition is wiper with the blades lifted from the
positioned, when washing. set back to ON with the blades in a windshield.
position other than rest position (at the Windshield Washer
Activation Of The Function base of the windshield), they will only
To activate this function, disable the The window washer nozzles are fixed. If
return to rest position following a
windshield wiper before setting the there is no jet of fluid, first check that
command given using the stalk (stalk
ignition device to STOP. there is fluid in the reservoir (see
upwards, into unstable position) or when
paragraph Engine Compartment in this
This function can only be activated within a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) is exceeded.
chapter).
two minutes of cycling the ignition to
STOP.

202
Open welding or loose connections may A hot exhaust system can start a fire if
permit exhaust gas to enter the you park over materials that can burn. Such
passenger compartment. materials might be grass or leaves coming
Have the exhaust system checked every into contact with your exhaust system. Do
time the vehicle is raised. Replace the not park or operate your vehicle in areas
components where necessary (for these where your exhaust system can contact
anything that can burn.
operations, contact an authorized
dealer).
In normal operating conditions, the Cooling System
catalytic converter does not require
maintenance. To ensure that it operates
09046S0003EM
Warning!
Windshield Washers correctly, however, and prevent it from
getting damaged, it is extremely
1 Washer Nozzles important that the engine operates You or others can be badly burned by hot
perfectly. engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
Then, check that the nozzle holes are not To minimize the risk of damaging the your radiator. If you see or hear steam
clogged; use a needle to unblock them if catalytic converter, proceed as follows: coming from under the hood, do not open the
necessary. hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Do not stop the engine or deactivate Never open a cooling system pressure cap
Exhaust System the ignition with gear engaged and when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
vehicle in motion. Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry
Adequate maintenance of the engine
exhaust system represents the best Do not attempt to start the engine by away from the radiator cooling fan when the
protection against leaks of carbon bump starting. hood is raised. The fan starts automatically
and may start at any time, whether the
monoxide into the passenger Do not persist in using the vehicle if engine is running or not.
compartment. idling is very irregular or the operating
If an unusual noise from the exhaust or When working near the radiator cooling
conditions are very notably irregular. fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn
the presence of smoke in the passenger the ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is
compartment is identified, or if the temperature controlled and can start at any
underbody or rear section of the vehicle time the ignition is in the ON mode.
Warning!
have been damaged, have the entire
exhaust system and adjoining bodywork
areas checked at your authorized dealer Coolant Check
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They
to identify any components which are contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is Your vehicle has two cooling systems and
broken, damaged, worn or have moved colorless and odorless. Breathing it can they both need to be checked to ensure
from their correct fitting position. make you unconscious and can eventually they are at proper fill levels. Refer to the
poison you. Engine Compartment section for the
locations.
203
Check the engine coolant and intercooler Periodically check the cap and clean it
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Do not use a pressure cap other than the


coolant level every oil change or before one specified for your vehicle. Personal from any foreign bodies that may have
long trips. injury or engine damage may result. deposited on the external surface.
If there are impurities in the engine
coolant, the system must be drained, Note: Before removing the coolant
flushed and refilled: contact an Warning!
reservoir cap, wait for the system to cool
authorized dealer. down.
Check the front part of the condenser to Never add coolant with the engine hot or
check for any build-up of insects, leaves Topping Up / Draining / Flushing The overheated.
or other debris. Should it be dirty, clean it Engine/Intercooler Coolant
Do not attempt to cool an overheated
by spraying delicately with water. If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, engine by loosening or removing the cap. The
Check the hoses of the engine/ have cleaning and flushing carried out at heat causes a considerable increase in
intercooler cooling system to ensure that an authorized dealer. pressure in the cooling system.
the rubber has not deteriorated and that See the "Maintenance Plan" for the To prevent damage to the engine, only
there are no cracks, tears, cuts or correct servicing intervals. use the engine cooling circuit caps provided.
obstructions in the expansion tank side
Note:
and radiator side connectors. Should Disposal of Used Coolant
there be any doubt regarding leaks from For topping up, use a fluid with the
the system (e.g. if frequent top ups are same characteristics as those indicated Disposal of engine/intercooler coolant is
required), have the seal checked at an in the "Fluids And Lubricants" table (see subject to legal requirements: contact
authorized dealer. "Technical Specifications" chapter). the appropriate body to determine local
regulations.
With the engine off and at normal Do not use pure water, alcohol-based
operating temperature, check that the coolants, corrosions inhibitors or Note:
cooling system radiator cap is closed additional anti-rust products because To prevent the fluid from being
properly. they may be incompatible with the ingested by children or animals, do not
engine coolant and cause the clogging keep it in open containers or pour it on
Warning! of the radiator. The use of propylene the ground. If ingested, contact a doctor
glycol-based coolant is also not immediately. Eliminate any traces of
recommended. fluid from the ground immediately.
Do not open hot engine cooling system.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when Engine Cooling/Intercooler System Cap
the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
To prevent loss of engine coolant, make
remove the cap to cool an overheated
engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in sure that the expansion tank cap is
the cooling system. To prevent scalding or closed. If it is open, screw it completely
injury, do not remove the pressure cap while until you reach/hear the click.
the system is hot or under pressure.
204
When the vehicle stops after a short Automatic Transmission
trip, steam may be seen coming out Warning! Use only a transmission oil with the same
from front of the hood. This is a normal characteristics as those indicated in the
phenomenon which is due to the "Fluids and Lubricants" table (see
presence of rain, snow or a lot of Use only manufacturer's recommended "Technical Specifications" chapter).
brake fluid. Refer to Fluids And Lubricants
moisture on the surface of the radiator.
in Technical Specifications for further Special Additives
With engine and system cold, do not information. Using the wrong type of brake Do not use any type of additive with the
top up with coolant beyond the fluid can severely damage your brake
automatic transmission oil. The
maximum level indicated on the system and/or impair its performance. The
proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is automatic transmission oil is a product
reservoir in the engine compartment. also identified on the original factory designed specially for this vehicle and its
installed hydraulic master cylinder performance may be compromised
Braking System reservoir. through the use of further additives.
In order to guarantee the efficiency of To avoid contamination from foreign
the braking system, periodically check its matter or moisture, use only new brake fluid Caution!
components; for this operation, contact or fluid that has been in a tightly closed
an authorized dealer. container. Keep the master cylinder
See the "Maintenance Plan" for the reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake Do not use chemical flushes in your
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture transmission as the chemicals can damage
correct servicing intervals.
from the air resulting in a lower boiling point. your transmission components. Such
Note: Driving with your foot resting on This may cause it to boil unexpectedly damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
the brake pedal may compromise its during hard or prolonged braking, resulting Limited Warranty.
in sudden brake failure. This could result in a
efficiency, increasing the risk of
collision.
accidents. When driving, never keep your
foot on the brake pedal and dont put Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
unnecessary strain on it to prevent the result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
brakes from overheating: excess pad parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire.
Brake fluid can also damage painted and
wear may cause damage to the braking
vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to avoid
system. its contact with these surfaces.
When an insufficient oil level is
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to
detected, contact an authorized dealer contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal
to have the system checked. components could be damaged, causing
Always keep the cap of the brake partial or complete brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
fluid reservoir (in the engine
compartment) completely closed.

205
Frequency of Oil Changes RAISING THE VEHICLE TIRES
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

In normal vehicle operating conditions, it If the vehicle requires lifting, visit an Tire Safety Information
is not necessary to change the authorized dealer which is equipped with
transmission oil. shop jacks or jack arms. Tire safety information will cover aspects
The vehicle lifting points are marked on of the following information: Tire
the side skirts with the symbols. Markings, Tire Identification Numbers,
Caution! Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire
Pressures, and Tire Loading.
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
authorized dealer immediately. Severe
Tire Markings
transmission damage may occur. An
authorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.

Replacing The Battery


If necessary, replace the battery with
another battery with the same 09056S0001EM
specifications. It is advised to contact an Vehicle Lift Point Locations
authorized dealer for replacement.
0601085395US
Follow the battery manufacturer's Tire Markings
instructions for maintenance.
Note: It will not be possible to open the 1 U.S. DOT 4 Maximum
trunk with a key or by pressing the button Safety Standards Load
in the passenger compartment when the Code (TIN) 5 Maximum
battery is disconnected. So, always 2 Size
position the manual trunk opening strap Pressure
on the trunk lock before disconnecting Designation 6 Treadwear,
the battery. The procedure is described in 3 Service Traction and
the "Storing The Vehicle" section in this Description Temperature
chapter.
Grades

206
Note: LT (Light Truck) Metric tire sizing is Temporary spare tires are designed
based on U.S. design standards. The size for temporary emergency use only.
P (Passenger) Metric tire sizing is
designation for LT-Metric tires is the Temporary high pressure compact spare
based on U.S. design standards.
same as for P-Metric tires except for the tires have the letter T or S molded
P-Metric tires have the letter P molded
letters LT that are molded into the into the sidewall preceding the size
into the sidewall preceding the size
sidewall preceding the size designation. designation. Example: T145/
designation. Example: P215/
Example: LT235/85R16. 80D18 103M.
65R15 95H.
High flotation tire sizing is based on
European Metric tire sizing is
U.S. design standards and it begins with
based on European design standards.
the tire diameter molded into the
Tires designed to this standard have the
sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
tire size molded into the sidewall
beginning with the section width. The
letter "P" is absent from this tire size
designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.

Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)

207
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

EXAMPLE:
R = Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle
loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire

208
Tire Identification Number (TIN) sidewalls will have the full TIN, including is not found on the outboard side, then
the date code, located on the white you will find it on the inboard side of the
The TIN may be found on one or both sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN tire.
sides of the tire; however, the date code on the outboard side of black sidewall
may only be on one side. Tires with white tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN

EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway
use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example:
031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

209
Tire Terminology And Definitions
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation
Maximum Inflation Pressure
pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicles loading capacity,
Tire Placard
the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.

Tire Loading And Tire Pressure


Note: The proper cold tire inflation
pressure is listed on the drivers side
B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver's
side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire,
including the spare tire (if equipped), at
least monthly and inflate to the
recommended pressure for your vehicle. 0806115150US 0806115151US
Example Tire Placard Location (Door) Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)

210
Tire And Loading Information Placard Loading occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs on the Tire
The vehicle maximum load on the tire and Loading Information placard. The
must not exceed the load carrying combined weight of occupants,
capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight
will not exceed the tire's load carrying (if applicable) should never exceed the
capacity if you adhere to the loading weight referenced here.
conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire Steps For Determining Correct Load
and Loading Information placard in Limit
Vehicle Loading in the Starting And (1) Locate the statement The
GUID-054900418-high.tif
Operating section of this manual. combined weight of occupants and
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Note: Under a maximum loaded vehicle cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
This placard tells you important condition, gross axle weight ratings
information about the: (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles XXX lbs. on your vehicle's placard.
1. Number of people that can be carried must not be exceeded. For further (2) Determine the combined weight
in the vehicle. information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, of the driver and passengers that will
and trailer towing, refer to Vehicle be riding in your vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry. Loading in the Starting And Operating
section of this manual. (3) Subtract the combined weight of
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle. the driver and passengers from XXX
To determine the maximum loading
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the conditions of your vehicle, locate the kg or XXX lbs.
front, rear, and spare tires. statement The combined weight of

211
(4) The resulting figure equals the (6) If your vehicle will be towing a Note:
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

available amount of cargo and trailer, load from your trailer will be If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
luggage load capacity. For example, transferred to your vehicle. Consult load from your trailer will be transferred
if XXX amount equals 1400 lbs. and this manual to determine how this to your vehicle. The following table
there will be five 150 lb passengers reduces the available cargo and shows examples on how to calculate
total load, cargo/luggage, and towing
in your vehicle, the amount of luggage load capacity of your vehicle. capacities of your vehicle with varying
available cargo and luggage load Metric Example For Load Limit seating configurations and number and
capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 For example, if XXX amount equals size of occupants. This table is for
(5x150) = 650 lbs.) 635 kg and there will be five 68 kg illustration purposes only and may not
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of be accurate for the seating and load
(5) Determine the combined weight carry capacity of your vehicle.
available cargo and luggage load capacity
of luggage and cargo being loaded on is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as For the following example, the
the vehicle. That weight may not shown in step 4. combined weight of occupants and
safely exceed the available cargo and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
luggage load capacity calculated in (392 kg).
Step 4.

212
GUID-054900419-high.tif

Warning!

Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of
the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.

213
Tires General Information At least once a month:
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Always drive with each tire inflated to the


recommended cold tire inflation pressure. Check and adjust tire pressure with a
Tire Pressure
good quality pocket-type pressure gauge.
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential Both under-inflation and over-inflation Do not make a visual judgement when
to the safe and satisfactory operation of affect the stability of the vehicle and can determining proper inflation. Tires may
your vehicle. Four primary areas are produce a feeling of sluggish response or look properly inflated even when they are
affected by improper tire pressure: over responsiveness in the steering. under-inflated.
Safety and Vehicle Stability Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or
Note:
Economy visible damage.
Unequal tire pressures from side to
Tread Wear side may cause erratic and
unpredictable steering response. Caution!
Ride Comfort
Safety Unequal tire pressure from side to
side may cause the vehicle to drift left or After inspecting or adjusting the tire
right. pressure, always reinstall the valve stem
cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from
Warning! Fuel Economy entering the valve stem, which could
Underinflated tires will increase tire damage the valve stem.
rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous
consumption.
and can cause collisions. Inflation pressures specified on the
Tread Wear placard are always cold tire inflation
Underinflation increases tire flexing and
can result in overheating and tire failure. Improper cold tire inflation pressures can pressure. Cold tire inflation pressure is
cause abnormal wear patterns and defined as the tire pressure after the
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to reduced tread life, resulting in the need vehicle has not been driven for at least
cushion shock. Objects on the road and for earlier tire replacement.
chuckholes can cause damage that result in
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
tire failure. Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of
Proper tire inflation contributes to a three hours. The cold tire inflation
Overinflated or underinflated tires can pressure must not exceed the maximum
affect vehicle handling and can fail comfortable ride. Over-inflation
produces a jarring and uncomfortable inflation pressure molded into the tire
suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control.
ride. sidewall.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering Check tire pressures more often if
problems. You could lose control of your Tire Inflation Pressures subject to a wide range of outdoor
vehicle.
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
Unequal tire pressures from one side of
listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear temperature changes.
the vehicle to the other can cause the
vehicle to drift to the right or left. edge of the driver's side door.
214
Tire pressures change by approximately vehicle loading may be required for When driving at speeds 100 mph
1 psi (7 kPa) per 12F (7C) of air high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to (160 km/h) and above, increased tire
temperature change. Keep this in mind your authorized tire dealer or original pressures and reduced vehicle loading
when checking tire pressure inside a equipment vehicle dealer for are required for high-speed vehicle
garage, especially in the Winter. recommended safe operating speeds, operation.
Example: If garage temperature = 68F loading and cold tire inflation pressures. For driving speeds above 100 mph
(20C) and the outside temperature = (160 km/h) recommended cold tire
32F (0C) then the cold tire inflation inflation pressures are listed below
pressure should be increased by 3 psi Warning! under "High Speed Tire Inflation
(21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for Pressure". Vehicle loading condition must
every 12F (7C) for this outside not exceed 688 lbs. (312 kg) (driver +
High speed driving with your vehicle under
temperature condition. three passengers + 88 lbs. (40kg)
maximum load is dangerous. The added
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to strain on your tires could cause them to fail. luggage).
6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO You could have a serious collision. Do not
NOT reduce this normal pressure build up drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum
or your tire pressure will be too low. capacity at continuous speeds above Warning!
75 mph (120 km/h).
Tire Pressures For High Speed
Operation High speed driving with your vehicle under
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation maximum load is dangerous. The added
The manufacturer advocates driving at Pressures strain on your tires could cause them to fail.
safe speeds and within posted speed For vehicle speeds below 100 mph You could have a serious collision.
limits. Where speed limits or conditions (160 km/h), recommended cold tire
are such that the vehicle can be driven at inflation pressures are listed on the Tire
high speeds, maintaining correct tire And Loading Information Placard located
inflation pressure is very important. on drivers side B-Pillar or the rear edge
Increased tire pressure and reduced of the driver's side door.

215
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Recommended Cold
High Speed Tire
Tire Inflation
Tires Wheel Inflation Pressure
Pressure

Front Rear Front Rear


35 psi/ 42 psi/
245/35Z R19 93Y XL 19x8.5J
240kpa 290kpa
Original Equipment
32 psi/ 42 psi/
285/30Z R19 98Y XL 19x10J
220kpa 290kpa
35 psi/ 42 psi/
245/35R19 93V XL M+S 19x8.5J
240kpa 290kpa
Snow Tires
285/30R19 98V XL M+S or 32 psi/ 42 psi/
19x10J
265/35R19 98V XL M+S 220kpa 290kpa

Radial Ply Tires The damage is only on the tread referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run
section of your tire (sidewall damage is Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation
not repairable). pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa).
Warning! Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat
The puncture is no greater than a of
mode it has limited driving capabilities
an inch (6 mm).
and needs to be replaced immediately. A
Combining radial ply tires with other types Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire Run Flat tire is not repairable.
of tires on your vehicle will cause your repairs and additional information. It is not recommended driving a vehicle
vehicle to handle poorly. The instability could Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer
cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires
that have experienced a loss of pressure while a tire is in the run flat mode.
in sets of four. Never combine them with
other types of tires. should be replaced immediately with See the tire pressure monitoring section
another Run Flat tire of identical size and for more information.
service description (Load Index and
Tire Repair Speed Symbol). Tire Spinning
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be
repaired if it meets the following criteria: Run Flat Tires If Equipped When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice
conditions, do not spin your vehicle's
The tire has not been driven on when Run Flat tires allow you the capability to wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
flat. drive 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph longer than 30 seconds continuously
(80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation without stopping.
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is
216
appear as bands when the tread depth Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). with as little exposure to light as
Warning!
When the tread is worn to the tread wear possible. Protect tires from contact with
indicators, the tire should be replaced. oil, grease, and gasoline.
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces Refer to Replacement Tires in this
generated by excessive wheel speeds may section for further information. Replacement Tires
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could The tires on your new vehicle provide a
explode and injure someone. Do not spin Life Of Tire
balance of many characteristics. They
your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds The service life of a tire is dependent should be inspected regularly for wear
continuously when you are stuck, and do not upon varying factors including, but not and correct cold tire inflation pressures.
let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter limited to: The manufacturer strongly recommends
what the speed. that you use tires equivalent to the
Driving style.
originals in size, quality and performance
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire when replacement is needed. Refer to the
Tread Wear Indicators inflation pressures can cause uneven paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators in
Tread wear indicators are in the original wear patterns to develop across the tire this section. Refer to the Tire and Loading
equipment tires to help you in tread. These abnormal wear patterns will Information placard or the Vehicle
determining when your tires should be reduce tread life, resulting in the need for Certification Label for the size
replaced. earlier tire replacement. designation of your tire. The Load Index
and Speed Symbol for your tire will be
Distance driven.
found on the original equipment tire
Performance tires, tires with a speed sidewall.
rating of V or higher, and Summer tires See the Tire Sizing Chart example found
typically have a reduced tread life. in the Tire Safety Information section of
Rotation of these tires per the vehicle this manual for more information relating
scheduled maintenance is highly to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a
recommended. tire.
It is recommended to replace the two
0806104865NA front tires or two rear tires as a pair.
Tire Tread Warning! Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicles handling. If you ever
1 Worn Tire
replace a wheel, make sure that the
2 New Tire Tires and the spare tire should be replaced
after six years, regardless of the remaining wheels specifications match those of the
tread. Failure to follow this warning can original wheels.
These indicators are molded into the result in sudden tire failure. You could lose It is recommended you contact an
bottom of the tread grooves. They will control and have a collision resulting in authorized tire dealer or original
serious injury or death.
217
equipment dealer with any questions you Compact Spare Tire If Equipped
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

may have on tire specifications or


Caution! The compact spare is for temporary
capability. Failure to use equivalent
replacement tires may adversely affect emergency use only. You can identify if
the safety, handling, and ride of your your vehicle is equipped with a compact
Replacing original tires with tires of a
vehicle. different size may result in false spare by looking at the spare tire
speedometer and odometer readings. description on the Tire and Loading
Information Placard located on the
Warning! drivers side door opening or on the
Spare Tires If Equipped sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire
Note: For vehicles equipped with Tire descriptions begin with the letter T or
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, Service Kit instead of a spare tire, please S preceding the size designation.
or speed rating other than that specified for refer to Tire Service Kit in In Case Of Example: T145/80D18 103M.
your vehicle. Some combinations of Emergency for further information. T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
unapproved tires and wheels may change
suspension dimensions and performance Since this tire has limited tread life, the
characteristics, resulting in changes to Caution! original equipment tire should be
steering, handling, and braking of your repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
vehicle. This can cause unpredictable your vehicle at the first opportunity.
handling and stress to steering and Because of the reduced ground clearance,
do not take your vehicle through an
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to
suspension components. You could lose
automatic car wash with a compact or mount a conventional tire on the compact
control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death. Use only the tire and limited use temporary spare installed. spare wheel, since the wheel is designed
wheel sizes with load ratings approved for Damage to the vehicle may result. specifically for the compact spare tire.
your vehicle. Do not install more than one compact
spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any
Never use a tire with a smaller load index Spare Tire Matching Original given time.
or capacity, other than what was originally
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a
Equipped Tire And Wheel If
smaller load index could result in tire Equipped
overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision. Your vehicle may be equipped with a
spare tire and wheel equivalent in look
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires and function to the original equipment
having adequate speed capability can result tire and wheel found on the front or rear
in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle
axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may
control.
be used in the tire rotation for your
vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the
recommended tire rotation pattern.
218
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of Your wheels are susceptible to
your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of deterioration caused by salt, sodium
Warning!
this limited use spare tire affects vehicle chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium
handling. Since it is not the same as your chloride, etc., and other road chemicals
Compact and collapsible spares are for original equipment tire, replace (or used to melt ice or control dust on dirt
temporary emergency use only. With these repair) the original equipment tire and roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph reinstall on the vehicle at the first soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have opportunity. harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to damage the wheels protective coating
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use that helps keep them from corroding and
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
Warning! tarnishing.
follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control. Caution!
Limited use spares are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare
Full Size Spare If Equipped tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire,
do not drive more than the speed listed on Avoid products or automatic car washes
The full size spare is for temporary the limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to that use acidic solutions or strong alkaline
the cold tire inflation pressures listed on additives or harsh brushes. Many
emergency use only. This tire may look aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic
like the originally equipped tire on the your Tire and Loading Information Placard
located on the drivers side B-Pillar or the car washes may damage the wheel's
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is protective finish. Such damage is not
rear edge of the drivers side door. Replace
not. This spare tire may have limited (or repair) the original equipment tire at the covered by the New Vehicle Limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the first opportunity and reinstall it on your Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel
tread wear indicators, the temporary use vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
full size spare tire needs to be replaced. vehicle control.
Since it is not the same as your original When cleaning extremely dirty wheels
equipment tire, replace (or repair) the including excessive brake dust, care must
original equipment tire and reinstall on Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
be taken in the selection of tire and wheel
the vehicle at the first opportunity. All wheels and wheel trim, especially cleaning chemicals and equipment to
aluminum and chrome plated wheels, prevent damage to the wheels. Mopar
Limited Use Spare If Equipped should be cleaned regularly using mild Wheel Treatment or Mopar Chrome
The limited use spare tire is for (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain Cleaner or their equivalent is
temporary emergency use only. This tire their luster and to prevent corrosion. recommended or select a non-abrasive,
is identified by a label located on the Wash wheels with the same soap solution non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
limited use spare wheel. This label recommended for the body of the vehicle chrome wheels.
contains the driving limitations for this and remember to always wash when the
spare. This tire may look like the original surfaces are not hot to the touch.

219
Tire Types
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Caution! All Season Tires If Equipped Warning!

All Season tires provide traction for all


Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a seasons (Spring, Summer, Fall, and Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice
bristle brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. Winter). Traction levels may vary conditions. You could lose vehicle control,
These products may damage the wheel's between different all season tires. All resulting in severe injury or death. Driving
protective finish. Such damage is not too fast for conditions also creates the
season tires can be identified by the M+S,
covered by the New Vehicle Limited possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire
Cleaner or equivalent is recommended. sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets
of four; failure to do so may adversely Snow Tires
affect the safety and handling of your
Note: If you intend parking or storing vehicle. Some areas of the country require the
your vehicle for an extended period after use of snow tires during the Winter. Snow
cleaning the wheels with wheel cleaner, Summer Or Three Season Tires If tires can be identified by a
drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to Equipped mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire
remove the water droplets from the sidewall.
brake components. This activity will Summer tires provide traction in both If you need snow tires,
remove the red rust on the brake rotors wet and dry conditions, and are not select tires equivalent
and prevent vehicle vibration when intended to be driven in snow or on ice. If in size and type to the
braking. your vehicle is equipped with Summer original equipment
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin tires, be aware these tires are not tires. Use snow tires
Chrome, or Low Gloss Clear Coat Wheels designed for Winter or cold driving only in sets of four;
conditions. Install Winter tires on your failure to do so may
vehicle when ambient temperatures are adversely affect the safety and handling
Caution! less than 45F (7C) or if roads are of your vehicle.
covered with ice or snow. For more
Snow tires generally have lower speed
information, contact an authorized
If your vehicle is equipped with these ratings than what was originally equipped
dealer.
specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel with your vehicle and should not be
cleaners, abrasives, or polishing compounds. Summer tires do not contain the all operated at sustained speeds over
They will permanently damage this finish season designation or mountain/ 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above
and such damage is not covered by the New snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original
Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH Use Summer tires only in sets of four; equipment or an authorized tire dealer
ONLY USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH failure to do so may adversely affect the
A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this for recommended safe operating speeds,
safety and handling of your vehicle. loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
is all that is required to maintain this finish.
While studded tires improve
performance on ice, skid and traction
220
capability on wet or dry surfaces may be Tire Rotation Recommendations
poorer than that of non-studded tires.
Caution! Tire Rotations - Do Not Rotate Tires
Some states prohibit studded tires;
therefore, local laws should be checked Due to different size tires and wheels on
before using these tire types. front and rear axles tire rotation is not
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,
observe the following precautions: possible for:
Tire Chains (Traction Devices)
Because of restricted traction device 2.9 L V6 Engine Equipped with 19
Use of traction devices require sufficient clearance between tires and other tires and wheels
tire-to-body clearance. Follow these suspension components, it is important that
recommendations to guard against only traction devices in good condition are
damage. used. Broken devices can cause serious Caution!
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if
Note: noise occurs that could indicate device
breakage. Remove the damaged parts of Damage to the vehicle may occur if 19 front
Traction device must be of proper
the device before further use. and rear tires are rotated
size for the tire, as recommended by the
traction device manufacturer Install device as tightly as possible and
then retighten after driving about mile In the case of irregular wear of the tires
Use on Rear Tires Only (0.8 km). identify the cause and correct it as soon
Due to limited clearance, the Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). as possible, by contacting an authorized
following traction devices are dealer.
recommended: Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns
and large bumps, especially with a loaded
For a 265/35R19 98V tire, use of a vehicle.
zero-clearance snow traction device
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
recommended. pavement.
It is not possible to install traction
Observe the traction device
devices on 285/30R19 tires. manufacturers instructions on the method
of installation, operating speed, and
conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device
manufacturers if it is less than 30 mph
(48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a compact
spare tire.

221
DEPARTMENT OF practices, and differences in road laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM characteristics and climate. temperature can cause the material
TIRE QUALITY GRADES of the tire to degenerate and reduce
Traction Grades
The following tire grading categories tire life, and excessive temperature
The Traction grades, from highest to can lead to sudden tire failure. The
were established by the National
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grade C corresponds to a level of
Highway Traffic Safety
grades represent the tire's ability to performance, which all passenger
Administration. The specific grade
stop on wet pavement, as measured vehicle tires must meet under the